Home

Lexmark XM3150

Contents

1. TE 5 25 5 35 Bhi ERE lt MER SUVS i BRA SS EA Notice to users in the European Union This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC 1999 5 EC 2009 125 EC and 2011 65 EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment the ecodesign of energy related products and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 1 Products equipped with 2 4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of E
2. 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the 4 port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem Note The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active VoIP providers may charge additional cost for activation of the second phone port 3 Connect your analog telephone phone to the port of the printer Notes To make sure that the telephone port on the cable modem is active plug an analog telephone into the telephone port and then listen for a dial tone If you hear a dial tone then the port is active f you need two telephone ports for your devices but do not want to pay additional cost then do not plug the printer into the second telephone port You can use a phone splitter Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line 1 or Phone Port and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter Make sure you use a phone splitter not a line splitter To make sure that you are using the correct splitter plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone Faxing 111 Setup 2 Printer is connected to a wall jack cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the 3 port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active
3. Troubleshooting Action Step 5 From the Flash Drive menu reduce the scan resolution settings and then resend the scan job Does the job scan Step 6 Check the scan settings Fromthe Scan screen make sure the Content Type and Content Source settings are correct for the document being scanned Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the document being scanned he Yes The problem is solved The problem is solved 313 No Go to step 6 Change the Content Type and Content Source settings to match the document being scanned La Scanner unit does not close Action Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit a Lift the scanner unit b Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open c Lower the scanner unit Did the scanner unit close correctly Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer Action Step 1 Check if other applications are interfering with the scan Close all applications that are not being used Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer Step 2 Select a lower scan resolution Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer Me Yes The problem is solved Yes Go to step 2 Contact customer support Contact customer support No The problem is solved The problem is solved N Troubleshooting Poor scanned image qua
4. Use To Plain Weight Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Card Stock Weight Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy A Understanding the printer menus 139 Use To Transparency Weight Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Recycled Weight Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Labels Weight Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Bond Weight Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Envelope Weight Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Rough Envelope Weight Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded Heavy Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Letterhead Weight Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Preprinted Weight Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal
5. Specify the paper type texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper type texture and weight specified in the tray settings The problem is solved Step 4 Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes Are you printing on textured or rough paper ss Se From the printer control panel change the texture settings in the Paper Texture menu to match the paper you are printing on Go to step 5 Troubleshooting Action Step 5 a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Is the print still too dark Yes Go to step 6 293 No The problem is solved Step 6 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Is the print still too dark Print is too light Action Step 1 a Fromthe Quality menu on the printer control panel increase the toner darkness Note 8 is the factory default setting b Resend the print job Is the print still too light Contact customer support Yes Go to step 2 The problem is solved No The problem is solved Step 2 From the printer control panel set the paper type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Is the tray set to th
6. Note Attachment is the factory default setting Use Multi Page Tiff On Off TIFF Compression LZW JPEG Provide a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to e mail job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Note On is the factory default setting Specify the format used in compressing TIFF files Note LZW is the factory default setting Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Enable printing of a transmission log after each e mail job Note Print log is the factory default setting Log Paper Source Tray x Multipurpose Feeder Specify the paper source for printing e mail logs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting E mail Bit Depth 1 bit 8 bit Custom Job scanning On Off Scan Preview On Off Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Enable the Text Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes Notes Off is the factory default setting This menu item appears only when a formatted working hard disk is installed Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs Notes Off is the factory default setting This menu item appears only when a formatted working har
7. 2 staples 4 staples Specify whether prints are stapled Notes Off is the factory default setting This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is installed Enable Color Fax Receive On Off Enable the printer to receive fax in color and print it in grayscale Note On is the factory default setting Fax Log Settings Use Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Receive Error Log Print Never Print on Error Auto Print Logs On Off To Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job Note Print log is the factory default setting Enable printing of a received error log Note Print Never is the factory default setting Enable automatic printing of fax logs Notes Onisthe factory default setting Logs print after every 200 fax jobs Log Paper Source Tray x Multipurpose Feeder Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Logs Display Remote Station Name Dialed Number Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name or fax name returned Note Remote Station Name is the factory default setting Enable Job Log On Off Enable access to the Fax Job log Note On is the factory default setting Enable Call Log On Off Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Enable access to the Fax Call log Note On is the factory
8. Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy Advanced Options Paper Saver select the output you want v gt Copy It Note If Paper Saver is set to Off then the Print Page Borders option is unavailable Creating a custom copy job The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job Each set may be scanned using different job parameters When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled the scanner scans the first set of original documents using the specified settings and then it scans the next set with the same or different settings The definition of a set depends on the scan source f you scan a document on the scanner glass then a set consists of one page f you scan multiple pages using the ADF then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF tray becomes empty f you scan one page using the ADF then a set consists of one page For example 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo
9. Enable Manual Fax On Off Setthe printer to fax manually which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset Notes Off is the factory default setting Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number Touch 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to this setting Memory Use All receive Mostly receive Equal Mostly send All send Define the allocation of non volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs Note Equal is the factory default setting Cancel Faxes Allow Don t Allow Specify whether canceling of fax jobs is allowed Note Allow is the factory default setting Caller ID Off Primary Alternate Fax number masking Off From left From right Digits to Mask 0 58 Specify the type of caller ID being used Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number Notes Offisthe factory default setting The number of characters masked is determined by the Digits to Mask setting Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number Note 0 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 176 Fax Cover Page Configure the fax cover page Fax Cover Page Off by default On by default Never use Notes Off by default is the factory default setting for Fax Cover Page Off is the factory default setting for all other menu items Always use Include to Field On Off
10. From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Delete fonts macros and other data stored in the flash memory Install a flash memory card with larger capacity Note Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted Paper changes needed Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Prompt for each page to continue printing Touch Use current supplies to continue printing using the paper loaded in the tray Cancel the current print job Parallel port x disabled 56 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Enable the parallel port From the printer control panel navigate to Network Ports Parallel x Parallel Buffer Auto Note The printer discards any data received through the parallel port Printer had to restart Last job may be incomplete From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing For more information visit http support lexmark com or contact customer support Remove defective disk 61 Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk Remove paper from standard output bin Remove the paper stack from the standard bin Troubleshooting 265 Replace defective imaging unit 31 xy Replace the defective imaging unit to clear the message For more information see the ins
11. Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Learning about the printer 14 3 Press Enter The Embedded Web Server page appears Understanding the basic functions of the scanner Make quick copies or set the printer to perform specific copy jobs Send a fax using the printer control panel Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time Scan documents and send them to your computer an e mail address or an FTP destination Scan documents and send them to another printer PDF through an FTP Using the ADF and scanner glass Automatic document feeder ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents including two sided duplex pages Use the scanner glass for single page documents book pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings V Fi Using the ADF When using the ADF Load the document into the ADF tray faceup short edge first Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper into the ADF tray Scan sizes from 105 x 148 mm 4 1 x 5 8 inches wide to 216 x 368 mm 8 5 x 14 5 inches long Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g m 14 32 Ib Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass Using the scanner glass When using the scanner gla
12. a Open the trays and then check if they contain paper of the same size and type Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded in each tray Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray b Resend the print job Do the trays link correctly Step 2 a Fromthe printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be linked Note The paper size and type must match for trays to be linked b Resend the print job Do the trays link correctly Yes The problem is solved The problem is solved No Go to step 2 Contact customer support Large jobs do not collate Action Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a From the Finishing menu on the printer control panel set Collate to 1 2 3 1 2 3 b Resend the print job Did the job print and collate correctly Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 a From the printer software set Collate to 1 2 3 1 2 3 Note Setting Collate to 1 1 1 2 2 2 in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu b Resend the print job Did the job print and collate correctly Troubleshooting 283 Action Increase the printing timeout a From the home screen navigate to i gt Settings gt General Settings g
13. is solved c customer Turn on Jam Recovery a From the home screen navigate to support ES Settings General Settings Print Recovery b From the Jam Recovery menu touch the arrows to scroll to On or Auto c Touch Submit s Do pages reprint after a jam Solving print problems Printing problems Multiple language PDF files do not print Yes No Action The problem is solved Go to step 2 Step 1 a Checkifthe print options for the PDF output are set to embed all fonts For more information see the documentation that came with Adobe Acrobat b Generate a new PDF file and then resend the print job Do the files print The problem is solved Contact customer Step 2 a Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat support b Click File gt Print gt Advanced gt Print As Image gt OK gt OK Do the files print e Se is Troubleshooting Error message about reading the flash drive appears Action Step 1 Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port Note The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear USB port Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB port Yes Go to step 2 277 No Insert the flash drive into the front USB port Step 2 Note A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy Is the indicator light blinking green Check if the indicat
14. 3 Click Print and Hold 4 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 5 Click OK or Print 6 From the printer home screen release the print job For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter the PIN gt Print For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print For Macintosh users 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the print options or Copies amp Pages pop up menu choose Job Routing 3 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 4 Click OK or Print 5 From the printer home screen release the print job For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter the PIN gt Print For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print Modifying confidential print settings 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen
15. 3 Lift the staple guard and then remove any jammed or loose staples 4 Press down the staple guard until it clicks into place Clearing jams 254 6 Close the staple access door 7 If necessary touch Done from the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing Troubleshooting 255 Troubleshooting Understanding the printer messages Cartridge low 88 xy You may need to order a replacement toner cartridge If necessary touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing Cartridge nearly low 88 xy If necessary touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing Cartridge very low x estimated pages remain 88 xy You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon For more information see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide If necessary touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing Change paper source to custom string load orientation Try one or more of the following Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then touch Finished changing paper Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins Cancel the print job Change paper source to custom type name load orientation Try one or more of the followi
16. CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Available internal options Memory card DDR3 DIMM Flash memory Fonts Firmware Forms Barcode Prescribe IPDS Printcryption Printer hard disk Lexmark Internal Solutions Ports ISP Parallel 1284 B interface MarkNet N8130 10 100 fiber interface MarkNet N8350 802 11 b g n Wireless Print Server RS 232 C serial interface Additional printer setup 28 Accessing the controller board A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer 1 Open the controller board access door 2 Open the controller board shield using the green handle Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static el
17. Enhance Fine Lines On Off Lighten or darken the printed output Notes 8is the factory default setting Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings maps electrical circuit diagrams and flow charts Notes Off is the factory default setting To set this option using the Embedded Web Server type the network printer IP address in the Web browser address field Gray Correction Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images Job Accounting menu Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting Off Brightness Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it You can conserve toner 6to6 by lightening the output Note O is the factory default setting Contrast Adjust the contrast of printed objects 0 5 Note 0 is the factory default setting Note This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Use Job Accounting Log Off On Job Accounting Utilities To Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives Note Off is the factory default setting Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive Daily Weekly Monthly Accounting Log Frequency Determine and set how often a log file is created Note Monthly is the factory default setting a ee Understanding the printer me
18. Lighten or darken the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Enter a dialing prefix such as 99 A numeric entry field is provided Understanding the printer menus Use Dialing Prefix Rules Prefix Rule x 178 To Establish a dialing prefix rule Automatic Redial 0 9 Redial frequency 1 200 Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number Note 5 is the factory default setting Specify the number of minutes between redials Note 3 is the factory default setting Behind a PABX Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone Yes Note No is the factory default setting No Enable ECM Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Enable Fax Scans On Off Driver to fax Yes No Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Dial Mode Tone Pulse Max Speed 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 Custom Job scanning On Off Fax files that are scanned at the printer Note On is the factory default setting Allow the print driver to send fax jobs Note Yes is the factory default setting Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer Note On is the factory default setting Specify a dialing sound Note Tone is the factory default setting Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent Note 33600 is the factory default setting Scan a document that cont
19. Note The menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state Understanding the printer control panel 17 Touch LES 9 Bookmarks Create organize and save a set of bookmarks URL into a tree view of folders and file links Note The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function and not from any other application 10 USB Drive View select print scan or e mail photos and documents from a flash drive Note This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or flash drive is connected to the printer 11 Held Jobs Display all current held jobs 12 Status Supplies Show a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue processing Access the messages screen for more information on the message and how to clear it 13 14 Tips Search held jobs Features Feature Menu trail line Example Menus gt Settings gt Copy Settings gt Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu Number of Copies Open a context sensitive Help dialog Search for one or more of the following items User name for held or confidential print jobs Job names for held jobs excluding confidential print jobs Profile names Bookmark container or print job names USB container or print job names for supported file types Description A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen This feature shows the
20. View the printer IP address on the printer control panel The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Network Ports gt Wireless 3 Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point wireless router Note Make sure to enter the correct SSID security method preshared key or passphrase network mode and channel 4 Click Submit 5 Turn off the printer and then disconnect the Ethernet cable Then wait for at least five seconds and then turn the printer back on 6 To verify if your printer is connected to the network print a network setup page Then in the Network Card x section see if the status is Connected Changing port settings after installing a new network ISP Notes fthe printer has a static IP address then you do not need to make any changes f the computers are configured to use the network name instead of an IP address then you do not need to make any changes f you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection then make sure the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder 2 From the shortcut menu of the printer with the new ISP open the printer properties 3 Configure the port from the list 4 Update the IP address 5 Ap
21. x page jam open tray x 24y xx 1 Pull out the tray completely Note The message on the printer display indicates the tray where the jammed paper is located 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 249 3 Insert the tray 4 From the printer control panel touch Done to clear the message and continue printing x page jam remove all pages from the output bin Leave paper in bin 45y xx Paper jam in the finisher bin 1 Empty the standard bin 2 Move the paper guides to the sides Clearing jams 250 3 Remove all jammed pages from inside the access areas Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed lI S 4 If necessary touch Done from the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing Paper jam in the finisher rear door 1 Open the finisher rear door 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 251 4 Close the narrow door Clearing jams 252 5 Close the finisher rear door m J 6 If necessary touch Done from the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing Staple jam in the finisher 1 Open the staple access door 2 Pull out the staple cartridge from the finisher Clearing jams 253
22. 241 x page jam open automatic feeder top cover 28y xx 240 x page jam open front door 20y xx 243 x page jam open rear door 20y xx 241 x page jam open tray x 24y xx 248 x page jam remove tray 1 to clear duplex 23y xx 246 A accessing the Embedded Web Server 20 Active NIC menu 144 adapter plug 111 adding hardware options print driver 46 ADF copying using 84 ADF separator roller ordering 226 adjusting copy quality 89 adjusting printer display brightness 216 adjusting Sleep mode 215 adjusting toner darkness 77 administrator settings Embedded Web Server 235 advanced options fax 123 FTP 94 FTP options 131 advanced options touch screen e mail 101 answering machine setting up 104 AppleTalk menu 149 applications home screen 22 understanding 21 attaching cables 46 available internal options 27 avoiding jams 72 avoiding paper jams 238 B blocking junk faxes 120 buttons printer control panel 15 buttons touch screen using 18 C cables Ethernet 46 USB 46 canceling a print job from a computer 82 from the printer control panel 82 canceling an e mail 99 cannot open Embedded Web Server 316 Card Copy setting up 23 card stock loading multipurpose feeder 58 tips 69 Cartridge low 88 xy 255 Cartridge nearly low 88 xy 255 Cartridge very low x estimated pages remain 88 xy 255 Change paper source to custom string load orientation 255 Change paper source t
23. 9 or the manual answer code on the telephone to receive the fax You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically Auto Answer On but you need to turn off the voice mail service when you are expecting a fax This setting works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax Faxing 108 Scenario 2 Digital Subscriber Line DSL A Digital Subscriber Line splits your regular telephone line into two channels voice and Internet Telephone and fax signals travel through the voice channel and Internet signals pass through the other channel This way you can use the same line for analog voice calls including faxes and digital Internet access To minimize interference between the two channels and ensure a quality connection you need to install a DSL filter for the analog devices fax machine telephone answering machine in your network Interference causes noise and static on the telephone failed and poor quality faxes for the printer and slow Internet connection on your computer Note Contact your DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter To install a filter for the printer 1 Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack 2 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the end to the phone port on the DSL filter port ofthe printer Connect the other 3 To connect a telephone to the printer remove any installed adapter plug from the port of the printer and then connect
24. Contents 5 Saving money and the environment eeeeeeeee eee eene eene ee eee 2 13 Saving paper arid tone eaae erene ettet a de eee apre eo egeo puse ee ER duaacasecs esedsuuelacdeedeledgansateaee dade 213 Using recycled papers cer Rte ro DIR EI TE SO RIEN EDI UR 213 Conserving supplles ciel tette nete eiie te ee e ev ec ET Y Ee A lesa eee UNS VV eee 213 SAVING CNS LC 214 Using ECO MOG6G n ennemi ne nein 214 Reducing printer Tioise a r e aa dene tein icut a aaa aa aa aa a lance s2etsh 214 Adj sting Sleep Modne ee tret tt ta deeds AEE o recedente aE aaa AEri teste Ea E taai 215 Oaa EEan EE A e eie eii ide 215 Setting Hibernate Time Utin aaa tate e a a a aa liani 215 Using Schedule Power Modes rtc e ete te nte adeo c SEP areae cet iee eia Ea teea 216 Adjusting the brightness of the printer display cccccccccsssssececcesssseeeceessseecescessseeeeeesessaseeeseeseaeesaeeesesses 216 i re To Tar REN 217 Recycling Lexmark products erede es Ae I dE Aca eria ee RS 217 Recycling Lexmark packaging nbi ne eet Nena iietetesit tuiles 217 Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling cccccecesssccccesssssseeeceesseaecceessssaeecessessaeeseeesenesesseeeeens 217 Securing the printe uso cervo enn inv xev eo rhrta td vv arvo dad ae tis oe yvue cerne d LO Statement of Volatilityi ite tri rater tee oder doe ea a eye beni rere eee kara uiae dai duk editas 219 Erasing volatile mem
25. Copy gt Copy from gt select the size of the original document gt ZS Copying 86 3 Navigate to Copy to select the tray that contains transparencies Copy It If there are no trays that contain transparencies then navigate to Manual Feeder gt ZS gt select the size of the transparencies gt ZS gt Transparency gt JS 4 Load transparencies into the multipurpose feeder and then touch Copy It Copying on letterhead 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy Copy from select the size of the original document ZS 4 Navigate to Copy to gt select the tray containing the letterhead gt Copy It 5 lf there are no trays that support letterhead then navigate to Manual Feeder gt select the size of the letterhead gt Letterhead 6 Load the letterhead faceup top edge first into the multipurpose feeder and then touch Copy It Customizing copy settings Copying to a different size 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner
26. Heavy Colored Weight Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Light Weight Specify that the relative weight of the paper loaded is light Light Heavy Weight Specify the relative weight of the paper loaded is heavy Understanding the printer menus 140 Use To Rough Cotton Weight Specify the relative weight of the cotton or rough paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Custom x Weight Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded Light Notes Normal Heavy Normal is the factory default setting The options appear only when the custom type is supported V A Paper Loading menu Use Recycled Loading Duplex Off Bond Loading Duplex Off Letterhead Loading Duplex Off Preprinted Loading Duplex Off Colored Loading Duplex Off Light Loading Duplex Off LES Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Recycled as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Bond as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Letterhead as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Preprinted as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Colored as the paper type Determine and set t
27. M 4 the printer Understanding the printer menus 144 Use To Print Directory Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or hard disk Notes Job Buffer Size must be set to 100 Make sure that the memory card or hard disk is installed and working correctly Asset Report Print a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name The report contains text and UPC bar codesthat can be scanned into an asset database Event Log Summary Print a summary of logged events M Network Ports menu Active NIC menu Active NIC Notes Auto Auto is the factory default setting list of available network cards This menu item appears only when an optional network card is installed Standard Network or Network x menu Note Only active ports appear in this menu Use To Energy Efficient Ethernet Reduce power consumption when the printer receives no data from the Ethernet Enable network Disable Note Enable is the factory default setting PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires On it regardless of the default printer langu
28. Off is the factory default setting Font Priority Establish the font search order Resident Flash Disk Notes Resident is the factory default setting This menu item is available only when a formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not read write write or password protected Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100 Understanding the printer menus PCL Emul menu Use Font Source 208 To Specify the set of fonts used in the Font Name menu PCL Emulation Settings Point Size 1 00 1008 00 Resident Notes Disk Download Resident is the factory default setting It shows the factory default set of Flash fonts downloaded in the RAM All Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option Make sure the flash option is properly formatted and is not read write or password protected Download shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM All shows all fonts available to any option Font Name Identify a specific font and where it is stored Courier 10 Note Courier 10 is the factory default setting Symbol Set Specify the symbol set for each font name 10U PC 8 Notes 12U PC 850 10U PC 8 is the US factory default setting 12U PC 850 is the international factory default setting Asymbol set is a set of alphabetical and numeric characters punctuation an
29. Potential Damage Do not use household cleaners or detergents to prevent damage to the exterior of the printer 5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job Maintaining the printer 224 Cleaning the scanner glass Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems such as streaks on copied or scanned images 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the scanner cover 1 White underside of the scanner cover 2 Scanner glass 3 ADF glass 4 White underside of the ADF cover 4 Close the scanner cover Maintaining the printer 225 Checking the status of parts and supplies Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel From the home screen touch Status Supplies View Supplies Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server Note Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Device Status More Details Ordering supplies To order supplies in the U S contact Lexmark at 1 800 539 6275 for information about Lexma
30. Scanning 129 Using the ScanBack Utility You can use the Lexmark ScanBack Utility instead of the Embedded Web Server to create scan to computer profiles The ScanBack Utility can be downloaded from the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com 1 Set up your scan to computer profile a Launch the ScanBack Utility b Select the printer If no printers are listed then contact your system support person or click Setup to manually search for an IP address or host name c Follow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and what kind of output you want to create Assign a file name of your scan profile and then specify a location on your computer e Click Finish A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images Note You can select Create Shortcut to create a shortcut of the scan profile settings to your desktop 2 Scan your original documents a Load all pages into the ADF or on the scanner glass b From the printer control panel navigate to Held jobs Profiles and Apps select your scan profile Note Your output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified Understanding the scan options FTP This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 File Name This opti
31. Standard Bin Note Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin x Fax Footer Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Max Speed Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received 2400 Note 33600 is the factory default setting 4800 9600 14400 33600 Fax Forwarding Print Print and Forward Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient Note Print is the factory default setting Forward Forward to Specify the type of recipient to which faxes are forwarded Fax Notes E mail FTP Faxis the factory default setting LDSS This menu is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server eSF Forward to Shortcut Enter the shortcut number that matches the recipient type Fax E mail FTP LDSS or eSF Block No Name Fax Off On Banned Fax List Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax ID specified Note Off is the factory default setting Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer Holding Faxes Held Fax Mode Off Always On Manual Scheduled Fax Holding Schedule Enable the printer to hold received faxes from printing until they are released Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 182 Staple Off 1 staple
32. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Printing f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Security Confidential Print Setup 3 Modify the settings 82 Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts When a user exceeds that number all of the jobs for that user are deleted Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs When a user has not printed the jobs within that time all of the jobs for that user are deleted 4 Click Submit to save the modified settings Printing information pages Printing a font sample list 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Print Fonts 2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts Printing a directory list A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Print Directory Canceling a print job Canceling a print job from the printer control panel 1 From the printer control panel touch Cancel Job or press X on the keypad 2 Touch the print job you want to cancel and then touch Delete Selected Jobs Note If you press X on the keypad then touch Resume to return to the home screen Canceling a print job from the computer For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder and then select your printer 2 From the pr
33. View Card Speed View the speed of an active wireless network adapter Network Address View the network addresses UAA LAA Job Timeout Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled 0 10 225 seconds Notes 90 seconds is the factory default setting Asetting value of 0 disables the timeout e fa value between 1 and 9 is selected then Invalid appears on the display and the value is not saved Banner Page Allow the printer to print a banner page Off On Note Off is the factory default setting TCP IP menu To access the menu navigate to either of the following Network Ports Standard Network Standard Network Setup TCP IP Network Ports Network x Network x Setup TCP IP Note This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers Use To Set Hostname Set the current TCP IP host name Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server IP Address View or change the current TCP IP address Note Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP Netmask View or change the current TCP IP netmask Understanding the printer menus 147 Use To Gateway View or change the current TCP IP gateway Enable DHCP Specify the DHCP address an
34. and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Scan Profile Create Scan Profile 3 Select your scan settings and then click Next 4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scan image 5 Type a scan name and then a user name Note The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display 6 Click Submit Note Clicking Submit automatically assigns a shortcut number You can use this shortcut number when you are ready to scan your documents Scanning 128 7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen a Loadan original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly b If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides c Do either of the following Press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad From the home screen navigate to Held Jobs Profiles select your shortcut on
35. business other 4 entity or individual For more information see Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment on page 324 To enter your fax setup information use the printer control panel or use your browser to access the Embedded Web Server and then enter the Settings menu Note If you do not have a TCP IP environment then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup information Using the printer control panel for fax setup When the printer is turned on for the first time a series of start up screens appear If the printer has fax capabilities then the Fax Name and Fax Number screens appear 1 When the Fax Name screen appears do the following a Enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes b Enter the fax name and then touch Submit 2 When the Fax Number screen appears enter the fax number and then touch Submit Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup 3 In the Fax Name field type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes Faxing 4 In the Fax Number field enter the printer
36. exporting a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 26 exterior of the printer cleaning 223 e mail canceling 99 e mail alerts low supply levels 235 paper jam 235 setting up 235 e mail function setting up 95 e mail options darkness 99 message 99 original size 99 page setup 100 recipient s 99 resolution 99 Send As 100 subject 99 e mail screen advanced options 101 options 99 101 E mail Settings menu 185 e mail shortcuts creating using the Embedded Web Server 96 e mail sending using a shortcut number 97 using the address book 98 e mailing adding message line 98 adding subject line 98 configuring e mail settings 95 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 96 creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 96 setting up e mail function 95 337 using a shortcut number 97 using the address book 98 using the printer control panel 97 F factory defaults restoring 237 fax sending 118 fax and e mail functions setting up 305 fax and e mail functions are not set up 305 fax log viewing 120 Fax memory full 258 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu 174 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu 183 fax name setting 115 fax number setting 115 fax options content source 122 content type 122 darkness 123 delayed send 123 page setup 123 resolution 123 scan preview 123 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 258 fax ports 46 fax screen advanced options 123 Fax server To Format n
37. input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Notes e Auto is the factory default setting On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs Offfilters print jobs using the standard protocol Understanding the printer menus Use ENA Address YYY YYY YVY VVY ENA Netmask YYY YYY YYY Yyy ENA Gateway YYY YYY YYY YYY Parallel x menu 151 To Set the network address information for an external print server Note This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Set the netmask information for an external print server Note This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Set the gateway information for an external print server Note This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Note This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed Use To PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language off Notes Onis the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incomi
38. om PELIGRO Se producen radiaciones l ser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado Evite la exposici n al haz de l ser FARA Osynlig laserstr lning n r patroner tas ur och sp rrmekanismen r upph vd Undvik exponering f r laserstr len ER YR i c B BURNER A EETILINE TEDIESRARSETEIBOCOCR Fo JERR IRIRE BC TB E HIST E EAT RUIT RR INE TRE eRe TE F8 IH COR Fe f amp fg XA bU v ZAERDA ATA Ay ABEC LE MAROLA SNES TOL F HICMKRSRWEDICLTK REV Power consumption Product power consumption The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product Note Some modes may not apply to your product Description Power consumption Watts Printing The product is generating hard copy output from electronic inputs 640 one sided 460 two sided Copy The product is generating hard copy output from hard copy original documents 660 Scan The product is scanning hard copy documents 35 Ready The product is waiting for a print job 20 Sleep Mode The product is in a high level energy saving mode 3 5 Hibernate The product is in a low level energy saving mode 0 4 Off The product is plugged into an electrical outlet but the power switch is turned O off The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time averaged measurements Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average Values are subjec
39. printer hard disk is installed This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power Understanding the printer menus Print Area Normal Whole Page 201 Set the logical and physical printable area Notes Normal is the factory default setting When attempting to print data in the non printable area defined by the Normal setting the printer clips the image at the boundary Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the non printable area defined by the Normal setting but the printer will clip the image at the Normal setting boundary This affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter This has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter Download Target RAM Flash Disk Set the storage location for downloads Notes RAM is the factory default setting Storing downloads in the RAM is temporary Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage Downloads remain in flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off This menu setting appears only when a formatted working flash drive or printer hard disk is installed Resource Save On Off Print All Order Alphabetical Oldest First Newest First Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads such as fonts and macros stored in the RAM when the printer receives a job that requires more memory t
40. scanning is paused and a preview image appears Note This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed Using the advanced options Select from the following settings Advanced Imaging This adjusts the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail and Sharpness settings before you fax the document Custom Job This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job Edge Erase This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Faxing 124 Transmission Log This prints the transmission log or transmission error log e Adjust ADF Skew This straightens scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF tray Note This option is supported only in select printer models Scanning 125 Scanning Using Scan to Network Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support person After the destinations shared network folders have been established on the network the setup process for the application involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using its Embedded Web Server For more information see Setting up Sca
41. 109 voids appear 299 VoIP adapter 109 volatile memory 219 erasing 219 volatility statement of 219 W Weblink server not set up Contact system administrator 269 wiping the printer hard disk 220 Wireless menu 148 wireless network configuration information 48 wireless network setup using the Embedded Web Server 51 wireless setup wizard using 49 Index 346 X XPS menu 207
42. 42 options copy screen copy from 93 scale 93 options touch screen copy 93 e mail 99 101 ordering imaging unit 226 maintenance kit 226 staple cartridges 226 ordering supplies toner cartridge 225 original size e mail options 99 scan options 129 output file type changing 98 scan image 130 P page setup e mail options 100 fax options 123 scan options 131 paper characteristics 69 different sizes copying 87 letterhead 71 loading multipurpose feeder 58 preprinted forms 71 recycled 71 saving 90 selecting 70 storing 72 unacceptable 70 Universal size setting 53 using recycled 213 Paper changes needed 264 paper feed troubleshooting message remains after jam is cleared 276 paper jams avoiding 238 paper jams clearing finisher bin 249 in automatic document feeder top cover 240 in duplex area 246 in finisher rear door 249 in front door 243 in manual feeder 247 in rear door 241 in standard bin 241 in staple access door 249 in tray x 248 paper labels loading multipurpose feeder 58 Paper Loading menu 140 paper size setting 53 Paper Size Type menu 133 paper sizes supported 72 paper stop using 63 Paper Texture menu 137 paper type setting 53 paper types supported by printer 74 where to load 74 340 Paper Weight menu 138 paper weights supported by printer 74 Parallel x menu 151 Parallel port x disabled 56 264 parts checking status 225 checking from printer control panel 225 checking using the E
43. 5 Note Best for content is the factory default setting Mirror Image Off On Create a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Negative Image Create a negative image of the original document Scan edge to edge Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Shadow Detail Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy 4 to 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting Adjust ADF Skew Correct slight skew in the scanned image Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting Off On Specify if the original document is scanned edge to edge Fax Settings menu Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Sharpness Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Sample Copy Create a sample copy of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line Understanding the printer menus General Fax Settings Use Restore Factory Defaults 175 To Restore the factory defaults of all fax settings Optimize Fax Compatibility Optimize fax compatibility with other fax machines Fax Name Specify the name of the fax in the printer Fax Number Specify the number assigned to the fax Fax ID Specify how the fax is identified Fax Name Note Fax Number is the factory default setting Fax Number
44. Action Check if there are no obstructions between the scanner unit and the printer a Lift the scanner unit b Remove any obstruction that keeps the scanner unit open c Lower the scanner unit Did the scanner unit close properly The problem is solved Yes The problem is solved Contact customer support No Contact customer support Troubleshooting Poor copy quality Action Step 1 Check if an error or status message appears on the display Does an error or status message appear Yes Clear the error or status message 303 Go to step 2 Check the placement of the document or photo Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Is the document or photo loaded correctly Step 6 Increase the scan resolution setting for a higher quality output Did the increased resolution produce a higher quality output Step 7 Check the copy settings From the Copy screen check if the Content Type and Content Source settings are correct for the document being scanned Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the document being scanned Step 2 Go to step 3 Increase the scan Check the quality of the original document resolution setting for a higher quality output Is the quality of the original document satisfactory Step 3 Go to step 4 See Cleaning the If dark marks appear on p
45. Additional rights Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights that vary from state to state Patent acknowledgment The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography ECC Cipher Suites for Transport Layer Security TLS implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA 256 382 and AES Galois Counter Mode GCM implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security TLS implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Sui
46. Default 21 Env Default 6 MPaper Default 2 MEnv Default 3 Tray Renumber Restore Defaults Return all tray drawer and feeder assignments to the factory default settings Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray drawer or feeder 210 Understanding the printer menus Yes i No HTML menu Font Name Joanna MT Set the default font for HTML documents Albertus MT Letter Gothic Note The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not Antique Olive Lubalin Graph specify a font Apple Chancery Marigold Arial MT Monalisa Recut Avant Garde Monaco Bodoni New CenturySbk Bookman New York Chicago Optima Clarendon Oxford Cooper Black Copperplate Coronet Courier Eurostile Garamond Geneva Gill Sans Goudy Helvetica Hoefler Text Intl CG Times Intl Courier Intl Univers Palatino StempelGaramond Taffy Times TimesNewRoman Univers Zapf Chancery NewSansMTCS NewSansMTCT New SansMTJA NewSansMTKO 211 Understanding the printer menus Font Size Set the default font size for HTML documents 1 255 pt Notes 12ptisthe factory default setting Font size can be increased in 1 point increments Scale Scale the default font for HTML documents 1340076 Notes 10096is the factory default setting Scaling can be increased in 196 increments Orientation Set the page orientation for HTML documents Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting
47. Include from Field On Off From Include Message Field On Off Message Include Logo On Off Include Footer x On Off Footer x Fax Send Settings Resolution Standard Fine 200 dpi Super Fine 300 dpi Ultra Fine 600 dpi Specify quality in dots per inch dpi A higher resolution gives better print quality but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes Note Standard is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Original Size Letter Legal Executive Tabloid Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A3 A4 A5 A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 Custom Scan Size x Book Original Business Card 3x5in 4x6in Sides Duplex off Long edge Short edge Content Type Text Graphics Text Photo Photo 177 To Specify the size of the original document Note Mixed Sizes is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two sided scanning Note Off is the factory default setting Specify the content of the original document Note Text is the factory default setting Content Source Black White Laser Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Specify how the original document was produced Note Black White Laser is the factory default setting Darkness 1 9 Dial Prefix
48. Landscape Margin Size Set the page margin for HTML documents 8 255 mm Notes 19 mm is the factory default setting Margin size can be increased in 1 mm increments Backgrounds Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents Do Not Print Note Print is the factory default setting Print Image menu Use To Auto Fit Select the optimal paper size scaling and orientation On Note On is the factory default setting It overrides scaling and orientation settings Off for some images Invert Invert bitonal monochrome images On Notes Off Off is the factory default setting This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images Scaling Scale the image to fit the selected paper size Anchor Top Left Notes Best Fit Anchor Center Fit Height Width Fit Height Fit Width BestFit is the factory default setting When Auto Fit is set to On Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit Understanding the printer menus 212 Use To Orientation Set the image orientation Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Reverse Portrait Reverse Landscape r M Help menu Print All Guides Prints all the guides Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and configuring the settings E mail Guide Provides information about sending e mails and configuring the settings Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes and configuring the settings FTP Guide Provides i
49. Note 50 is the factory default setting multiple page scan to FTP job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Note On is the factory default setting Note LZW is the factory default setting Note Print log is the factory default setting Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting FTP bit Depth Enable the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images Custom Job Scanning On Off Scan Preview On Off ee 1 bit Note 8 bit is the factory default setting 8 bit File Name Type a base file name Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Notes e Off is the factory default setting This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Understanding the printer menus Use Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Background Removal 4to4 193 To Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses Note On is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Enable an equal balance of colors in the output Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Thresho
50. Orientation Portrait Landscape Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Custom Scan Size x Book Original Business Card 3x5in 4x 6in Lighten or darken the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Specify the orientation of the scanned image Note Portrait is the factory default setting Specify the size of the original document Note Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Sides Duplex Off Long Edge Short Edge JPEG Quality Best for content 5 90 Text Default 196 To Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two sided scanning Note Off is the factory default setting Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality Notes Best for content is the factory default setting 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image 5 90 Note 75 is the factory default setting Text Photo Default Set the quality of a text photo image in relation to file size and quality 5 90 Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default 5 90 Use Multi Page TIFF On Off S
51. Recognize and make the white text on a black background editable Note On is the factory default setting Auto Contrast Enhance Off On Automatically adjust the contrast to improve OCR quality Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 200 Recognized Languages Set the language or languages that the OCR can recognize English For each language select from the following options French Off German On Spanish Note The language is enabled by default If it is set to a value that is not in the list Italian of recognized languages English is enabled by default Portugues Danish Dutch Norwegian Swedish Finnish Hungarian Polish Print Settings Setup menu Printer Language PCL Emulation PS Emulation Set the printer language Notes PCL Emulation is the factory default setting Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language Job Waiting Specify that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they On require unavailable printer options or custom settings Off Print jobs removed from the print queue are stored in a separate print queue so other jobs print normally When the missing information or options are obtained the stored jobs print Notes Offisthe factory default setting This menu setting appears only when a formatted working
52. This setting appears only when a formatted working hard disk is installed e Off is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF Secure PDF requires you to enter your password twice Content Type Text Graphics Text Photo Photo Content Source Black White Laser Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Specify the content of the original document Note Text Photo is the factory default setting Specify how the original document was produced Note Black White Laser is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 191 Use To Color Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color off Note On is the factory default setting On Resolution Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch dpi 75 dpi Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting 150 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi Darkness Lighten or darken the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specify the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Original Size Specify the size of the original document Letter Note Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory Legal default setting Executive Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Custom Scan Size x Book Original Busine
53. Z A i 13 i Copy to Letter 8 5 x 11 in Plain Paper o 1102 Sided On Content Scale Auto E 10096 kh Text Photo Save As Shortcut Darkness o m j n E Touch LES View a list of options Print a copy Advanced Options Select a copy option Home Go to the home screen Increase Select a higher value Decrease Select a lower value Open a context sensitive Help dialog Other touch screen buttons Accept Save a setting Understanding the printer control panel Cancel Cancel an action or a selection Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes Reset Reset values on the screen Setting up and using the home screen applications 20 Setting up and using the home screen applications Notes Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active applications Some applications are supported only in some printer models There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase For more information go to www lexmark com or contact the place where you purchased the printer Finding the IP address of the computer For Windows users 1 In the Run dialog box type cmd to open the command prompt 2 Type ipconfig and then look for the IP address For Macintosh users 1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu select Network 2 Select your connection type and the
54. a i Remote Syslog non logged events determines if the printer sends events to Yes the remote server that have a severity level greater than the value of the E mail log cleared alert Severity of events to log setting No is the factory default setting No E mail log cleared alert determines if the printer sends an e mail to the Yes administrator every time a log is deleted through the printer control panel or E mail log wrapped alert EWS No is the factory default setting No E mail log wrapped alert determines if the printer sends the administrator Yes an e mail when log entries are wrapping No is the factory default setting E mail 6 full alert E mail 96 full alert determines if the printer sends the administrator an No e mail when the log fills a certain amount of its allotted space No is the Yes factory default setting 96 full alert level 96 full alert level determines if the space occupied by log equals or exceeds 1 99 the value of the full alert level 90 is the factory default setting E mail log exported alert E mail log exported alert determines if the printer sends the administrator No an e mail when there is a log exported No is the factory default setting Yes E mail log settings changed alert determines if the printer sends the E mail log settings changed alert administrator an e mail when the value of the Enable Audit Log setting is No toggled No is the factory default setting Yes Log line en
55. and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution You need to know your printer model type and serial number For more information see the label at the back of the printer The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem Visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com and then select one of the following p Tech Library You can browse our library of manuals support documentation drivers and other downloads to help you solve common problems EY E mail You can send an e mail to the Lexmark team describing your problem A service representative will respond and provide you with information to solve your problem Live chat You can chat directly with a service representative They can work with you to solve your printer problem or provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems install updates or complete other tasks to help you successfully use your Lexmark product Telephone support is also available In the U S or Canada call 1 800 539 6275 For other countries or regions visit http support lexmark com Notices 318 Notices Product information Product name Lexmark XM3150 Machine type 7016 Model s 679 Edition notice October 2014 The following paragraph does not a
56. capability and is attached to a network then print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration Printing a menu settings page From the home screen navigate to Reports Menu Settings Page Printing a network setup page If the printer is attached to a network then print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration 1 From the home screen navigate to Reports Network Setup Page 2 Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the status is Connected Ifthe statusisNot Connected then the LAN drop may not be active or the network cable may be malfunctioning Consult a system support person for a solution and then print another network setup page Loading paper and specialty media 53 Loading paper and specialty media The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print For more information see Avoiding jams on page 238 and Storing paper on page 72 Setting the paper size and type From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Paper Size Type gt select a tray gt select the paper size or type gt Submit Notes The Paper Size setting is automatically set according to the position of the paper guid
57. company This equipment uses the RJ 11C Universal Service Order Code USOC jack A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is Notices 325 provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant See your setup documentation for more information The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact your local telephone company For products approved after July 23 2001 the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQHHTXXXX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point for example 03 is a REN of 0 3 For earlier products the REN is shown separately on the label If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the cu
58. default setting Specify the bin for the printed fax logs Note Standard Bin is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 183 Speaker Settings Specify the mode of the speaker Speaker Mode Always Off On until Connected Note On until Connected is the factory default setting A sound is issued until the fax connection is made Always On Speaker Volume Set the speaker volume to high or low High Low Note High is the factory default setting Ringer Volume Enable or disable the ringer volume Off On Note On is the factory default setting V Answer On All Rings Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls Single Ring Only Note All Rings is the factory default setting Double Ring Only Triple Ring Only Single or Double Rings Only Single or Triple Rings Only Double or Triple Rings Only Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu Fax Mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission To Format Enter specific fax information Reply Address Subject Message Specify SMTP setup information SMTP Setup Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server port information Secondary SMTP Gateway Image Format PDF pdf XPS xps TIFF tif Specify the image format Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Content Type Text Graph
59. default setting On Shadow Detail Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible 4 to 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting Adjust ADF Skew Correct the slight skew in the scanned image Auto Notes Off On Auto is the factory default setting Scan edge to edge This menu item is supported only in some printer models Specify if the original document is scanned edge to edge before faxing Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Sharpness Adjust the sharpness of a fax 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature Specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default 4 to 4 while warm values generate a redder output than the default Note 0 is the factory default setting 180 Understanding the printer menus Enable Color Fax Scans Off by default On by default Never use Always use Enable color faxing Note Off by default is the factory default setting Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono Faxes On Off Fax Receive Settings Use Enable Fax Receive On Off Convert all outgoing faxes to black and white Note On is the factory default setting To Allow the printer to receive fax jobs Note On is the factory default setting Enable Caller ID On Off Display the number sending the incoming fax job Note On is the default factory setting Fax Job Waiting None Toner Toner and Supplies Rings to Answer 1 25
60. display Note 100 is the factory default setting Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time Note Off is the factory default setting Audio Feedback Button Feedback On Off Volume 1 10 Show Bookmarks Yes No Specify the audio volume for the buttons Notes Onisthe factory default setting for Button Feedback e 5 is the factory default setting for Volume Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area Note Yes is the factory default setting Allow Background Removal On Off Specify whether image background removal is allowed Note On is the factory default setting Allow Custom Job Scans On Off Scan multiple jobs to one file Note On is the factory default setting If On is selected then Allow Custom Job Scans can be enabled for specific jobs Scanner Jam Recovery Job Level Page Level Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs in the ADF Note Job Level is the factory default setting Web Page Refresh Rate 30 300 Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshes Note 120 is the factory default setting Contact Name Specify a contact name Note The contact name is stored on the Embedded Web Server Location Specify the location Note The location is stored on the Embedded Web Server Alarms Set an alarm when the printer requires user intervention Alarm Control Cartri
61. eh ce Deere etae tesi te un edle utes 234 Managing the printer ree ere eda uar en non ee vn enne un per en Yee e uev 23D Finding advanced networking and administrator information eese 235 Checking the virtual disp lay iiec set etn erp ethernet te eant eran to len ent e teen arte d od EEEE 235 Setting up e miail alerts iiec o eerte chi reete asa e e arti E ene ea A eee E ta EE esee raa aa Rea Ee 235 Viewing ROPOMtS PX 235 Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Servel ccsssssssesscceeceesssssssssnsaseseeeeeees 236 Restoring factory default SettingS ccscsscccccccccsssssesssrseecececececescesssusaeeseesesesssseseseessnsaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseesss 237 Cl ariBg jalTiS sii Fase Fei RE RPEREERS Goss ces FOXETI RET SEA SE INFE VE tenses ire easi D Avoiding Jaims oder eee ti erre eee Eee odd eere E E ETE ERE exe AERE gen Ree ded ee eee ch 238 Understanding jam messages and locations sessseeseeeeeeeeenennn enne nennen enhn nnne ener n 239 x page jam open automatic feeder top cover 28y XX cccececessssssnseeceeceeeseesesnsnsaeeeeeeeeeesesesnaneees 240 x page jam clear standard bin 20y xx essen nnne nnne nn 241 x page jam open rear door 20y xx esee eene nnn nnnm nnne nnne nnns 241 x page jam open front door 2OY XX csessssssccceeceecescecesessseaeseeceeceseeeescesesneusaeeceseeeeeesesesseenene nnn 24
62. fax number 5 Click Submit Choosing a fax connection Scenario 1 Standard telephone line Setup 1 Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line x LINE To connect a 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the s port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack Tips for this setup that you want e You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically Auto Answer On or manually Auto Answer Off f you wantto receive faxes automatically Auto Answer On then set the printer to pick up on any number of rings 104 Faxing 105 Setup 2 Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine Connected to the same telephone wall jack To connect 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the 4 port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack 3 Connect the answering machine to the port of the printer Faxing 106 Connected to different wall jacks LINE To connect 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the 3 port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack Tips for this setup f you have only one telephone number on your line then you need to set the printer to receive faxes automatically Auto Answer On Setthe printer to
63. full behavior Wrap over oldest entries E mail log then delete all entries Remote Syslog Server determines the value used to send logs to the remote syslog server Remote Syslog Port identifies the port over which the printer transmits logged events to a remote server Remote Syslog Method identifies the protocol used by the printer to transmit logged events to a remote server Normal UDP is the factory default setting Remote Syslog Facility determines the Facility value that the printer uses when sending events to the remote syslog server 4 is the factory default setting Log full behavior determines how the printer resolves if the log entirely fills its allotted memory Wrap over oldest entries is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 161 Use To Configure Log continued Specify how audit logs are configured Admin s e mail address Notes 256 character string Digitally sign exports Admin S e mail address determines if administrators are automatically Off notified of certain log events This setting can have one or more e mail a addresses separated by commas n S itv of TRON Digitally sign exports determines if the printer automatically signs each SES OLS MU OE exported security log Off is the factory default setting 0 7 d Severity of events to log records the severity value of each event 4 is the Remote Syslog non logged events factory default setting No
64. glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy Copy from select the size of the original document ZS 4 Navigate to Copy to gt select a new size for the copy gt v gt Copy It Copying 87 Making copies using paper from a selected tray 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy Copy from select the size of the original document ZS 4 Navigate to Copy to gt select the tray containing the paper type you want to use gt ZS 5 Touch Copy It Copying different paper sizes Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the Copy to and Copy from settings each copy is eith
65. into the connector and then push the card toward the controller board wall until it clicks into place 5 Close the controller board shield and then the controller board access door Note When the printer software and any hardware options are installed you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs For more information see Adding available options in the print driver on page 46 Additional printer setup 31 Installing an optional card A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 28 2 Unpack the optional card Warning Potential Damage Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card Doing so may cause damage 3 Holding the card by its sides align the plastic pins 1 on the card with the holes 2 on the c
66. is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations 5 Touch v 6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying Color Laser The original document was printed using a color laser printer Inkjet The original document was printed using an inkjet printer Magazine The original document is from a magazine Press The original document was printed using a printing press Black White Laser The original document was printed using a mono laser printer Photo Film The original document is a photo from a film Newspaper The original document is from a newspaper Other The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer 7 Touch Y gt Copy It Collating copies If you print multiple copies of a document then you can choose to print the copies as a set collated or to print the copies as groups of pages not collated Copying 90 Collated Not collated 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigat
67. is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Step 4 Check if the electrical outlet is turned off by a switch or breaker Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker V Turn on the switch or reset the breaker Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Turn on the printer Check if the printer is turned on Is the printer turned on Step 2 Go to step 3 Connect the printer Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the cable securely to the computer print server option or other network device printer and the computer print server option or other Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer p i network device print server option or other network device Step 3 Go to step 4 Connect the power cord to the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Go to step 5 Troubleshooting 312 Action Yes No Step 5 Connect the printer Go to step 6 Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors uninterruptible Power cord directly to power supplies or extension cords a properly grounded electrical outlet Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors uninterruptible power supplies or extension cords Step 6 Unplug the other Go to step 7 Check other electrical equipment plugged into the o
68. is reached the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel Note The PIN is set from the computer It must be four digits using the numbers 1 9 Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory when all copies are printed Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time Note The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu Notes Confidential Verify Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs Printing 81 2 Touch Submit Printing confidential and other held jobs Note Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you delete them For Windows users 1 With a document open click File Print 2 Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup
69. is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Copy To Source Tray x Auto Size Match Multipurpose Feeder Specify the paper source for copy jobs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Transparency Separators On Off Place a sheet of paper between transparencies Note On is the factory default setting Separator Sheets Off Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Place a sheet of paper between pages copies or jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Separator Sheet Source Tray x Multipurpose Feeder Specify the paper source for the separator sheet Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Darkness 1 9 Number of Copies 1 9999 Lighten or darken the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Specify the number of copies for the copy job Note 1 is the factory default setting 173 Understanding the printer menus Use Header Footer Location Off Date Time Page number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Overlay Confidential Copy Draft Urgent Custom Off Custom Overlay To Specify the header or footer information and its location on the page For the location select from the following options Top left Top middle Top right Bottom left Bottom middle Bottom right Notes e Offis the factory default setting for the loca
70. it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Security Disk Encryption Note Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed 3 From the Disk encryption menu select Enable Notes Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on a list of functions appears on the printer display 3 Touch Disk Encryption Enable Note Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk 4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping Notes Do notturn off the printer during the encryption process Doing so may result in loss of data Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks Securing the printer 222 Astatus bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task After the disk has been encrypted the printer will return to the Enable Disable screen 5 Touch Back Exit Confi
71. letterhead 86 on transparencies 85 photos 85 placing separator sheets between copies 90 quick copy 84 reducing 88 selecting a tray 87 to a different size 86 using the ADF 84 using the scanner glass 85 copying different paper sizes 87 copying multiple pages on one sheet 90 copying on both sides of the paper duplexing 88 copying on transparencies 85 creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 118 creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 125 creating custom name paper type 64 336 creating profiles using the ScanBack Utility 129 custom name configuring 65 Custom Names menu 141 custom paper type name assigning 65 Custom Scan Sizes menu 142 Custom Type x changing paper type 65 creating custom name 64 Custom Types menu 141 customer support contacting 317 D darkness copy options 93 e mail options 99 fax options 123 scan options 130 date and time fax setting 116 daylight saving time setting 116 Default Source menu 133 Defective flash detected 51 257 delayed send fax options 123 different paper sizes copying 87 Digital Subscriber Line DSL fax setup 108 digital telephone service fax setup 110 directory list printing 82 Disk full 62 257 Disk must be formatted for use in this device 258 disk wiping 220 display troubleshooting printer display is blank 271 display printer control panel 15 adjusting brightness 216 disposing of printer hard disk 219 distinctive ring se
72. may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com or contact customer support and then report the message If necessary touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Troubleshooting 263 Memory full 38 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Cancel job to clear the message Install additional printer memory Memory full cannot print faxes From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message without printing Held faxes attempt to print after the printer is restarted Memory full cannot send faxes 1 From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and cancel the fax job 2 Try one or more of the following Reduce the fax resolution and then resend the fax job Reduce the number of pages in the fax and then resend the fax job Network x software error 54 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to continue printing Turn off the printer wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on Update the network firmware in the printer or print server For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com No analog phone line connected to modem fax is disabled Connect the printer to an analog phone line Non Lexmark supply type see User s Guide 3
73. menu on the printer control panel check the paper type texture and weight texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper Do the paper type texture and weight match the paper loaded in the logoen imithe tray tray Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved Resend the print job support Does the toner still rub off Uneven print density EX ABCD ABCD Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Contact customer The problem is solved support Is the print density uneven Troubleshooting Solving copy problems Copier does not respond on page 302 Scanner unit does not close on page 302 Poor copy quality on page 303 Partial document or photo copies on page 304 Copier does not respond Action Step 1 Check if an error or status message appears on the display Does an error or status message appear Yes Clear the error or status message 302 Go to step 2 Step 2 Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Go to step 3 Connect the power cord to the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Step 3 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn it back on Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear Scanner unit does not close
74. of paper For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting see Using Eco Mode on page 214 Using recycled paper As an environmentally conscious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for 4 use in laser printers For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer see Using recycled paper and other office papers on page 71 Conserving supplies Use both sides of the paper If your printer model supports two sided printing then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper Notes Two sided printing is the default setting in the print driver For a complete list of supported products and countries go to http support lexmark com Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by setting multiple page printing N Up for the print job Saving money and the environment 214 Check your first draft for accuracy Before printing or making multiple copies of a document Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before you print it Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy Avoid paper jams 4 Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams For more information see Avoiding jams on page 238 Saving energy Usi
75. path taken to arrive at the current menu Number of Copies is not underlined because it is the current screen If you touch an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the number of copies is set and saved then the selection is not saved and it does not become the default setting Attendance message alert Warning A Status message bar If an attendance message affects a function then this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks If an error condition occurs then this icon appears Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy Show printer conditions such as Toner Lowor Cartridge Low Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing Understanding the printer control panel 18 Feature Description Printer IP address The IP address of your network printer is located at the upper left corner of the home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods You can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer Example 123 123 123 123 Using the touch screen buttons Note Your home screen icons and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded solutions Side Duplex Collate Copy from o Letter 8 5 x 11 in q 2 R lt 2
76. per Page Paper Size and Orientation settings Select the paper size and orientation before setting Lines per Page PCL Emulation Settings A4 Width 198 mm 203 mm PCL Emulation Settings Auto CR after LF On Off Set the printer to print on A4 size paper Notes 198 mm is the factory default setting The 203 mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of eighty 10 pitch characters Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return CR after a line feed LF control command Note Off is the factory default setting PCL Emulation Settings Auto LF after CR On Off Tray Renumber Assign MP Feeder Off None 0 199 Assign Tray x Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Paper Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Envelope Off None 0 199 Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed LF after a carriage return CR control command Note Off is the factory default setting Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays drawers and feeders Notes Off is the factory default setting None ignores the Select Paper Feed command This selection appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5e interpreter e 0 199 allows a custom setting to be assigned Tray Renumber View Factory Defaults MPF Default 8 T1 Default 1 T2 Default 4 T3 Default 5 T4 Default 20 T5
77. printer home screen and then follow the instructions on the printer display Setting up Remote Operator Panel This application enables you to interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically nearthe network printer From your computer you can view the printer status release held print jobs create bookmarks and do other print related tasks 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings Remote Operator Panel Settings 3 Select the Enable check box and then customize the settings 4 Click Submit To use the application click Remote Operator Panel Launch VNC Applet Setting up and using the home screen applications 26 Exporting and importing a configuration You can export configuration settings into a text file and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 To export or import a configuration for one application do the following a Click Settings Apps Apps Management b From the list of installed applications click the name of
78. printer models Faxing 102 Faxing Note Fax capabilities are available only in some printer models Automatic document feeder ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Setting up the printer to fax CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm Notes The following connection methods are applicable only in select countries or regions During the initial printer setup clear the fax function check box and any other function you plan to set up later and then touch Continue The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled but not fully set up Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax Faxing 103 Initial fax setup Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission fax name identification of the business other entity or individual sending the message and fax number telephone number of the sending fax machine
79. required information depending on the header or footer you selected and then touch Done 5 Touch SA and then press lt gt Placing an overlay message on each page An overlay message can be placed on each page The message choices are Urgent Confidential Copy Custom and Draft 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy Advanced Options Overlay select overlay message Done Copy It Canceling a copy job Canceling a copy job while the original document is in the ADF When the ADF begins processing a document touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass From the home screen touch Cancel Job Canceling appears on the display When the job is canceled the Copy screen appears Copying 93 Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed 1 From the printer control panel touch Cancel Job or press X on the keypad 2 Touch the job you want to cancel and then touch Delete Selected Jobs Note If you press X
80. requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Chapter Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825 1 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The printer contains internally a Class IIIb 3b laser that is nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655 675 nanometers The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition Laser advisory label A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown Notices 322 DANGER Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated Avoid exposure to laser beam PERIGO Radia o a laser invis vel sera liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido Evite a exposi o aos feixes de laser Opasnost Nevidljivo lasersko zra enje kada su kasete uklonjene i poni tena sigurnosna veza Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima NEBEZPE Kdy jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokov na pojistka ze za zen je vys l no neviditeln laserov z en Nevystavujte se p soben laserov ho paprsku FARE Usynlig laserstr ling n r patroner fjernes og sp rreanordningen er sl et fra Undg at blive udsat for laserstr len GEVAAR Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd
81. sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Security Set Date and Time 3 In the Manually Set Date amp Time field enter the current date and time 4 Click Submit Note It is recommended to use the network time Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Security Set Date and Time 3 Select the Automatically Observe DST check box and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time Zone Setup section 4 Click Submit Sending a fax You can use the printer to send a fax to one or more recipients in a number of ways You can type the e mail address use a shortcut number or use the address book You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut application from the home screen For more information see Activating the home screen applications on page 22 Sending a fax using the printer control panel 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or fa
82. size paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper To use the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel Note If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper then it feeds from that tray or feeder If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper then it prints from the default paper source Cancel the current job Load Manual Feeder with custom type name paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper From the printer control panel touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing From the printer control panel touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray Cancel the print job Troubleshooting 262 Load Manual Feeder with custom string paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper From the printer control panel touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing From the printer control panel touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray Cancel the print job Load Manual Feed
83. the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray Cancel the print job Troubleshooting 260 Insufficient memory to collate job 37 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job Cancel the current print job Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 37 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing Delete fonts macros and other data in the printer memory Install additional printer memory Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 37 From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 37 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 35 Install additional printer memory ortouch Continue to disable Resource Save clear the message and continue printing Load paper source with custom type name paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper Touse the tray with the correct paper size or type touch
84. the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 Adjust the paper guides Copying 85 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy specify the copy settings Copy It Copying using the scanner glass 1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy specify the copy settings Copy It If you have more pages to scan then place the next document on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the next page 3 Touch Finish the Job Copying photos 1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Content gt Photo gt ZS 3 From the Content Source menu select the appropriate setting that best matches the original photo 4 Touch S gt Copy It Note If you have more photos to copy then place the next photo on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the next page 5 Touch Finish the Job Copying on specialty media Copying on transparencies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 From the home screen navigate to
85. the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack 3 Change the distinctive rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer Note The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On This sets the printer to answer single double and triple ring patterns a From the home screen navigate to Settings Fax Settings Analog Fax Setup Answer On b Select the pattern setting you want to change and then touch ZS Setting the outgoing fax name and number 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Fax Settings Analog Fax Setup 3 In the Fax Name field type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes 4 In the Fax Number field enter the printer fax number 5 Click Submit Faxing 116 Setting the date and time You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four
86. to the telephone adapter Notes The port of the printer may have an adapter plug for use with the adapter Do not remove the plug from the port of the printer n some countries or regions the printer may not come with a telephone adapter or an adapter plug Faxing 114 Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany The German wall jack has two kinds of ports The N ports are for fax machines modems and answering machines The F port is for telephones N Connect the printer to any of the N ports 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came the printer to the 3 port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the RJ 11 adapter and then connect the adapter to an N port Faxing 115 3 If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack then connect the devices as shown Note Do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded telephone system Connecting to a distinctive ring service A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company This service lets you have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line with each telephone number having a different ring pattern This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of
87. unsupported USB device is inserted Remove the USB device and then insert a supported one Error reading USB hub Remove hub An unsupported USB hub has been inserted Remove the USB hub and then install a supported one Fax memory full From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Turn off the printer and then turn it back on If the message appears again then contact your system support person Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Complete the Fax Server setup If the message appears again then contact your system support person Fax Station Name not set up Contact system administrator Try either of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Complete the Analog Fax setup If the message appears again after completing the setup then contact your system support person Troubleshooting 259 Fax Station Number not set up Contact system administrator Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Complete the Analog Fax setup If the message appears again after completing the setup then contac
88. visit www lexmark com 2014 Lexmark International Inc All rights reserved GOVERNMENT END USERS The Software Program and any related documentation are Commercial Items as that term is defined in 48 C F R 2 101 Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation as such terms are used in 48 C F R 12 212 or 48 C F R 227 7202 as applicable Consistent with 48 C F R 12 212 or 48 C F R 227 7202 1through 227 7207 4 as applicable the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U S Government end users a only as Commercial Items and b with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein Notices 319 Trademarks Lexmark Lexmark with diamond design and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc registered in the United States and or other countries Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett Packard Company PCL is Hewlett Packard Company s designation of a set of printer commands language and functions included in its printer products This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands All other trademarks are the property of thei
89. you enter the recipient of your e mail You may enter multiple e mail addresses Subject This option lets you type a subject line for your e mail Message This option lets you type a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment File Name This option lets you customize the attachment file name Original Size This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to e mail When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes letter and legal size pages Darkness This option lets you adjust how light or dark your scanned documents are in relation to the original document Resolution This option lets you adjust the output quality of your e mail Increasing the image resolution increases the e mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size E mailing 100 Send As This option lets you set the output type for the scan image Select one of the following PDF Use this to create a single file with multiple pages This can be sent as a secured or compressed file TIFF Use this to create multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG JPEG Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of y
90. 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Manage Shortcuts gt Fax Shortcut Setup Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password then contact your system support person 3 Type a name for the shortcut and then enter the fax number Notes Tocreate a multiple number shortcut enter the fax numbers for the group Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon 4 Assign a shortcut number Note If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 5 Click Add Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen touch Fax and then enter the fax number Note To create a group of fax numbers touch Next number and then enter the next fax number o 2 Touch 3 Type a unique name for the shortcut and then touch Done 4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK Note If the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information Customizing fax settings Changing the fax resolution 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glas
91. 137 Paper Weight 138 Parallel x 151 PCL Emul 208 PDF 207 PostScript 207 Quality 203 Reports 143 Security Audit Log 160 Serial x 153 Set Date Time 161 Settings 200 SMTP Setup menu 155 Standard Network 144 Standard USB 149 Substitute Size 137 TCP IP 146 Universal Setup 142 Utilities 206 Wireless 148 XPS 207 message e mail options 99 Miscellaneous Security Settings menu 158 mobile device printing from 79 moving the printer 10 233 234 Multi Send adding a profile 24 setting up 24 multipurpose feeder loading 58 MyShortcut about 23 N Network x menu 144 Network x software error 54 263 Network Card menu 146 Network Reports menu 145 network settings Embedded Web Server 235 network setup page printing 52 Index Networking Guide where to find 235 No analog phone line connected to modem fax is disabled 263 noise emission levels 319 Non Lexmark supply type see User s Guide 33 xy 263 non volatile memory 219 erasing 220 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 52 264 notices 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 number of remaining pages estimate 226 O OCR Settings menu 199 optional card installing 31 optional tray loading 53 options 250 sheet tray installing 43 550 sheet tray installing 43 firmware cards 27 Internal Solutions Port installing 32 memory card 29 memory cards 27 printer hard disk installing 39 printer hard disk removing
92. 16 x 340 mm 8 5 x 13 4 in V Folio 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 in V Statement 140 x 216 mm 5 5 x 8 5 in X Universal 105 x 216 mm to 216 x 356 mm X 4 13 x 8 5 in to 8 5 x 14 in 7 3 4 Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm 3 9 x 7 5 in X 9 Envelope 98 x 225 mm 3 9 x 8 9 in X 10 Envelope 105 x 241 mm 4 1 x 9 5 in X DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm 4 3 x 8 7 in X C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm 6 38 x 9 01 in X B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 in X Other Envelope 98 x 162 mm 3 9x6 4in to 176 x 250 mm x M 6 9 x 9 8 in Supported paper types and weights Paper type Plain paper Card stock Staple finisher Transparencies Recycled Paper labels Bond Envelope Rough envelope X x amp ISISI Paper and specialty media guide Paper type Letterhead Preprinted Colored paper Staple finisher 76 Light paper Heavy paper Rough Cotton Custom Type x ee a ee IS Printing 77 Printing Printing forms and a document Printing forms Use Forms and Favoritesto quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that is regularly printed Before you can use this application first set it up on the printer For more information see Setting up Forms and Favorites on page 22 1 From the home screen navigate to Forms and Favorites select the form from the list enter the number of copies adjust other settings 2 Apply the
93. 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 Reduce the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the print job and then resend the job Did the job print Step 3 The problem is solved Go to step 4 a Remove held jobs stored in the printer memory b Resend the print job Did the job print Step 4 The problem is solved Go to step 5 a Disable the Page Protect feature From the printer control panel navigate to sem gt Settings gt General Settings gt Print Recovery gt Page Protect gt Off b Resend the print job Did the job print Step 5 The problem is solved Go to step 6 a Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer b Resend the print job Did the job print Step 6 The problem is solved Contact customer Install additional printer memory and then resend the print job support Did the job print Nun e eee Troubleshooting Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper Action Step 1 a Checkif you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray b Resend the print job Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper Step 2 a From the Paper menu on the printer control panel set the paper size and type to match the paper loaded in the tray b Resend the print jo
94. 23 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Types 3 Select a custom paper type name and then select a paper type Note Paper is the factory default paper type for all user defined custom names 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to Paper Menu Custom Types 2 Select a custom paper type name and then select a paper type Note Paper is the factory default paper type for all user defined custom names 3 Touch v Configuring a custom name Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Loading paper and specialty media 66 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Paper Menu Custom Types 3 Select a custom name you want to configure then select a paper or specialty media type and then click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to Paper Menu Custom Types 2 Select a custom name you want to configure and then touch v Paper and specialty media guide 67 Paper and specialty media guide Notes
95. 276 paper curl 289 paper frequently jams 275 print job takes longer than expected 280 tray linking does not work 282 unexpected page breaks occur 283 printer 46 basic model 11 finishing features 75 fully configured 11 minimum clearances 10 moving 10 233 234 selecting a location 10 shipping 234 printer configurations 11 printer control panel 15 adjusting brightness 216 factory defaults restoring 237 indicator light 15 Sleep button light 15 printer control panel virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 235 Printer had to restart Last job may be incomplete 264 printer hard disk disposing of 219 encrypting 221 installing 39 removing 42 wiping 220 printer hard disk encryption 221 printer hard disk memory erasing 220 printer information where to find 9 printer IP address finding 20 printer is printing blank pages 284 printer messages x page jam remove all pages from the output bin Leave paper in bin 45y xx 249 x page jam clear manual feeder 25y xx 247 x page jam clear standard bin 20y xx 241 x page jam open automatic feeder top cover 28y xx 240 x page jam open front door 20y xx 243 x page jam open rear door 20y xx 241 x page jam open tray x 24y xx 248 x page jam remove tray 1 to clear duplex 23y xx 246 Cartridge low 88 xy 255 Cartridge nearly low 88 xy 255 Cartridge very low x estimated pages remain 88 xy 255 Change paper source to custom stri
96. 3 x page jam remove tray 1 to clear duplex 23y xx esses 246 x page jam clear manual feeder 25y XX cccsessssceecescssesssseeseeceecesessssssusseeeceseessesssauseseseeeeseseean es 247 x page jam open tray x 24y XX cccssssssscccececcessssssesseesaseceeeeceseeeesseseseseususaeeeseceeeesceseesesneasaeeeeess 248 x page jam remove all pages from the output bin Leave paper in bin 45y xx 249 TFGUDIESNGOUN Ae PHYS NOTICES eserin aeaee RR PTUS LO Prod ct inforriation 5 2 rete eicere ete eee eet Eee Eve e te Eee ceti eee ile ve veloce oles eek acct atv eben Cue 318 Edition NOTCE erena a a ae a aE E a a a eanan 318 Power consurnptlOficz ci imr ere it eee a Ha Ee ee Ep d NEVE ENEE re LEE TH ER Re LE ada ea 322 NNN PNE E E E E E E Safety information 7 Safety information Connect the power cord directly to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not use this product with extension cords multioutlet power strips multioutlet extenders or other types of surge or UPS devices The power rating capacity of these types of accessories can be easily overloaded by a laser printer and may result in poor printer performance property damage or potential fire Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations CAUTION POTENTIA
97. 3 xy Note The supply type can be a toner cartridge or the imaging unit The printer has detected a non Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts Use of third party supplies or parts may affect the performance reliability or life of the printer and its imaging components All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts and may deliver unpredictable results if third party supplies or parts are used Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or associated components Warning Potential Damage Use of third party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage Damage caused by the use of third party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty To accept any and all of these risks and to proceed with the use of non genuine supplies or parts in your printer press and hold XJ and on the printer control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds to clear the message and continue printing Troubleshooting 264 If you do not wish to accept these risks then remove the third party supply or part from your printer and then install a genuine Lexmark supply or part Note For the list of supported supplies see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 52 Try one or more of the following
98. 35 C 34 to 95 F 8 to 80 RH Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE directive The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European Union We encourage the recycling of our products If you have further questions about recycling options visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com for your local sales office phone number India E Waste notice This product complies with the India E Waste Management and Handling Rules 2011 which prohibit use of lead mercury hexavalent chromium polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0 1 by weight and 0 01 by weight for cadmium except for the exemption set in Schedule II of the Rules Product disposal Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste Consult your local authorities for disposal and recycling options Notices 321 Static sensitivity notice This symbol identifies static sensitive parts Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer ENERGY STAR Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency EPA ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark ENERGY STAR Laser notice The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the
99. 46 b Resend the print job Does the internal option operate correctly ee i is The problem is solved Contact customer support Troubleshooting 273 Tray problems Action Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a Pull out the tray and then do one or more of the following Check for paper jams or misfeeds Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray f youare printing on custom size paper then make sure that the paper guides rest against the edges of the paper Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator Make sure paper lies flat in the tray b Check if the tray closes properly Is the tray working Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 a Turn off the printer then wait about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on b Resend the print job Is the tray working Step 3 Go to step 4 Reinstall the tray For Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer more information see the setup Print a menu settings page and then check if the tray is listed in the Installed Features list documentation that came with the tray Is the tray listed in the menu settings page Step 4 The problem is solved Contact customer Check if the tray is available in the printer driver support Note If necessary manually add the tray in the printer driver to mak
100. 5 A6 JIS B5 Letter Legal Executive Oficio Mexico Folio Statement Universal Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu M Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded Note Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Manual Paper Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Custom Type x Manual Envelope Size 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope 136 Specify the paper type being manually loaded Notes Plain Paper is the factory default setting From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Manual for Manual Paper Type to appear as a menu Specify the envelope size being manually loaded Note 10 Envelope is the U S factory default setting DL Envelope is the international factory default setting Manual Envelope Type Envelope Rough Envelope Custom Type x Specify the envelope type being manually loaded Note Envelope is the factory default setting Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu Configure MP menu Use Configure MP Cassette Manual First LE Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder Notes Cassette is the f
101. 6 connecting printer to distinctive ring service 115 connecting to a wireless network using PIN Personal Identification Number method 50 using Push Button Configuration method 50 using the Embedded Web Server 51 using wireless setup wizard 49 conservation settings brightness adjusting 216 conserving supplies 213 Eco Mode 214 Hibernate mode 215 Hibernate Timeout 215 Quiet Mode 214 Schedule Power Modes 216 Sleep Mode 215 conserving supplies 213 contacting customer support 317 content e mail settings 100 content source e mail settings 100 fax options 122 content type e mail settings 100 fax options 122 control panel printer 15 indicator light 15 Sleep button light 15 controller board accessing 28 copies copy options 94 copy job canceling using the ADF 92 using the scanner glass 92 copy options collate 94 copies 94 darkness 93 save as shortcut 94 sides duplex 93 copy quality adjusting 89 copy screen content source 94 content type 94 options 93 Copy Settings menu 170 copy troubleshooting copier does not respond 302 partial document or photo copies 304 poor copy quality 303 poor scanned image quality 314 scanner unit does not close 302 313 copying adding an overlay message 92 adjusting quality 89 canceling a copy job 92 93 collating copies 89 custom job 91 different paper sizes 87 enlarging 88 inserting a header or footer 92 multiple pages on one sheet 90 on both sides of the paper duplexing 88 on
102. 69 printer security information on 222 printing canceling from the printer control panel 82 directory list 82 font sample list 82 forms 77 from a mobile device 79 from flash drive 78 from Macintosh 77 from Windows 77 menu settings page 52 network setup page 52 printing a directory list 82 printing a document 77 printing a font sample list 82 printing a menu settings page 52 printing a network setup page 52 printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer 81 from Windows 81 printing forms 77 printing from a flash drive 78 printing from a mobile device 79 publications where to find 9 Push Button Configuration method using 50 Q Quality menu 203 Quiet Mode 214 R recipient s e mail options 99 recycled paper using 71 213 recycling Lexmark packaging 217 Lexmark products 217 toner cartridges 217 reducing a copy 88 reducing noise 214 Index Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge 31 xy 265 Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit 31 xy 266 Remote Operator Panel setting up 25 Remove defective disk 61 264 Remove paper from standard output bin 264 removing printer hard disk 42 repeat print jobs 80 printing from a Macintosh computer 81 printing from Windows 81 repeating print defects appear on prints 291 Replace all originals if restarting job 265 Replace cartridge O estimated pages remain 88 xy 265 Replace defective imaging unit 31 xy 265 Replace im
103. ARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD ALL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS PRICES AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE Limitation of liability Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph Lexmark s liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS LOST SAVINGS INCIDENTAL DAMAGE OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark Lexmark s and its Suppliers and Remarketers limitations of remedies are not cumulative Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation
104. C Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC 1999 5 EC 2009 125 EC and 2011 65 EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits radio equipment and telecommunications terminal Notices 330 equipment the ecodesign of energy related products and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries but is restricted to indoor use only Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below AT EE EL IT LI PT RO SE SI SK TR UK Cesky Spole nost Lexmark International Inc t mto prohla uje Ze v robek tento v robek je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES Dansk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produkt overholder de v sentlige krav og vr
105. Create a negative image of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Shadow Detail Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image 4 to 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting Adjust ADF Skew Correct the slight skew in the scanned image Auto Notes Off On Auto is the factory default setting This menu item appears only in some printer models Specify whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Sharpness Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature Specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default Ato4 while warm values generate a redder output than the default Note 0 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use cc bcc On FTP Settings menu Use Format PDF pdf TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps RTF rtf TXT txt Enable the use of the cc and bcc fields Note Off is the factory default setting rma Specify the file format Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting PDF Settings PDF Version 1 2 1 7 A 1a A 1b PDF Compression Normal High Secure PDF Off On Searchable PDF Off On Configure the PDF settings Notes 1 5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression
106. Customizing the home screen c etin asked e Esa dpa repe a OE ERRE CR RAE ug aed n vH S agi MMaR Rd Nude aaae 21 Understanding the different applications cccceesseccccesssneceeceseseceeceeeeeaeeeceseseneceeeeseseaeeeesseneeeeeeeeeeeeeas 21 Activating the home screen applications eese enne en nennt inn nasi ann nnn 22 Finding information about the home screen applications eee 22 Setting p Forms arid Favorites rede aide dier idera Fra ERR ries Lbs ai gir dc a Rap bau bua 22 S tting p Card COPY EE 23 STAES a eUh EE E M S 23 Setting up Multi Send siii e to Rv ea Ea Y eei Resort dee bu Rute el AAE A EE e aiaa aE AAE EEEE EEEE 24 Setting up Scan to Network cccccccesessscecceessssecccesesesseeeecesssseeescessseseceseseaseeessessaseseseesusaeeeessessceesaeeseeeseeenaeees 24 Setting up Remote Operator Panel sssrinin akaka ao a ie ieia 25 Exporting and importing a configuration ssssssssserrsssssssssrsrerrrrtrsrsssssssssrrererensnsssssssrnrerererrrsesrrrrrett 26 Additional printer setup sssssssssessesosessecssssssossosecssosessesosecsecsessecsssseessse 27 Installing internal OptlOns dacs neneiia aeea aea aa i aiea E ana ak 27 Available internal Options sissien irie e cede tota e enano Dean Rn RE Dea aded a cesa dr dca Rada dee Ma Toda a da dde ui 27 Accessing the controller board cer edd e ego eg aan od pa
107. DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical noise in the serial cable The electrical noise can cause stray characters to print Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing SMTP Setup menu Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server gateway and port information Primary SMTP Gateway Port Note 25 is the default SMTP gateway port Secondary SMTP Gateway Secondary SMTP Gateway Port Understanding the printer menus Use SMTP Timeout 5 30 Reply Address Use SSL Disabled Negotiate Required 156 To Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to send an e mail Note 30 is the factory default setting Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e mail sent by the printer Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the SMTP server Notes Disabled is the factory default setting When the Negotiate setting is used the SMTP server determines if SSL will be used SMTP Server Authentication No authentication required Login Plain CRAM MD5 Digest MD5 NTLM Kerberos 5 Specify the type of user authentication required for scan to e mail privileges Note No authentication required is the factory default setting Device Initiated E mail None Use Device SMTP Credentials User Initiated E mail None Use Device SMTP Credentials Use Session User ID and Password Use Se
108. EC 2006 95 EC 2009 125 EC and 2011 65 EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits the ecodesign of energy related products and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 1 Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal equipment such as facsimile Notice to users of the US telephone network FCC requirements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments ACTA On the back of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ TXXXX If requested this number must be provided to your telephone
109. Finished loading paper on the printer control panel Note If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper size and type then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper size and type then it prints from the default paper source Cancel the current job Troubleshooting 261 Load paper source with custom string paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the indicated tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper To use the tray with the correct paper size or type touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel Note If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper size and type then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size then it prints from the default paper source Cancel the current job Load paper source with paper size paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size of paper Touse the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel Note If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size of paper then it feeds from that tray or feeder If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size of paper then it prints from the default paper source Cancel the current job Load paper source with paper type paper
110. Forms and Favorites setting up 22 forwarding faxes 122 FTP FTP options 129 FTP address creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 125 FTP address scanning to using a shortcut number 126 using the printer control panel 126 FTP options advanced options 131 FTP 129 FTP screen advanced options 94 FTP Settings menu 190 G General Settings menu 163 green settings Eco Mode 214 Hibernate mode 215 Hibernate Timeout 215 Quiet Mode 214 Schedule Power Modes 216 H hardware options adding print driver 46 held jobs 80 printing from a Macintosh computer 81 printing from Windows 81 Help menu 212 Hibernate mode using 215 Hibernate Timeout setting 215 hiding icons on the home screen 21 holding faxes 121 home screen customizing 21 hiding icons 21 showing icons 21 home screen applications configuring 22 finding information 22 home screen buttons and icons description 16 HTML menu 210 l icons on the home screen hiding 21 338 showing 21 Image menu 211 imaging unit ordering 226 replacing 229 Imaging unit low 84 xy 259 Imaging unit nearly low 84 xy 259 Imaging unit very low x estimated pages remain 84 xy 259 importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 26 in finisher rear door paper jams clearing 249 Incompatible tray x 59 259 Incorrect paper size open paper source 34 259 initial fax setup 103 using the Embedded Web Server 103 inserting a header or footer 92 insta
111. ION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters 1 Turn off the printer using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Additional printer setup 44 2 Unpack the tray and then remove all packing material 3 Pull out the tray from the base 4 Remove any packing material from inside the tray 5 Insert the tray into the base 6 Place the tray near the printer 7 Align the printer with the tray and then slowly lower the printer into place Note Optional trays lock together when stacked Additional printer setup 45 8 Connect the power cord to the printer then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn on the printer Notes When the printer software and any hardware options are instal
112. IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Doone or more of the following Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions a Click Settings gt General Settings gt Home screen customization b Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen Note If you clear a check box beside an icon then the icon does not appear on the home screen C Click Submit Customize the icon for an application For more information see Finding information about the home screen applications on page 22 or see the documentation that came with the application Understanding the different applications Use To Card Copy Scan and print both sides of a card on a single page For more information see Setting up Card Copy on page 23 Fax Scan a document and then send it to a fax number For more information see Faxing on page 102 Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen For more information see Setting up Forms and Favorites on page 22 Multi Send Scan a document and then send it to multiple destinations For more information see Setting up Multi Send on page 24 MyShortcut Create shortcuts directly on the printer home screen For more information see Using MyShortcut on page 23 Scan to E mail Scan a document and then send it to an e mail address For more inf
113. L INJURY This product uses a laser Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure This product uses a printing process that heats the print media and the heat may cause the media to release emissions You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced Do not recharge disassemble or incinerate a lithium battery Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions and local regulations CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching it A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it f an optional tray is installed then remove it from the printer To
114. LEXMARK XM3150 User s Guide October 2014 Machine type s 7016 Model s 679 www lexmark com Contents 2 Contents Safety INFOKIM AMON Me Y 7 Learning about the printer cssssscccsssssccssccssscssccnsscssccssscsscccasssecccasssessasD Finding information about the printer nnne enne nenne nennen ener rennen neni 9 Selecting a location for the printer enne nennt enn nns rsen nene nennen nnns 10 Printer configulatiOrs cceoee erede aree aeos ape ca Etre pa are oO E ace ve ERR aue a a E 11 Using the Embedded Web Servel cssssssssssscccececesccssessesesnsnsaeaeesecceseeceessesesesseauaasueseesecesesseseseseeeeseesees 13 Understanding the basic functions of the SCANNET ssscccceessesessssnseeceeecesseessseseeeeseeseseeausaeeeeesesesenees 14 Using the ADF and scanner Qlass ccscccessesenceceeseeeceeseenaeeeceseaeeecseaaeeceecesuaeecesesaeeceseeeaaeeeeeseeaaaaeeeeeeees 14 Understanding the printer control panel eese 15 Setting up and using the home screen applications 20 Finding the IP address of the computer sse enen nnn nnns nsn nne nnne nnne nnn 20 Finding the IP address of the printer esses enne ennn nenas nnns annes 20 Accessing the Embedded Web Servel ssssssssssccceeceessssnsnseeeeccecescesssenseseeeeeseessesaaeaueseeeeesseseessasaeaensa 20
115. Labels f available a user defined name will appear instead of Custom Type x Vinyl Labels Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking Bond Envelope Rough Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Custom Type x Multipurpose Feeder Size Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder A4 A5 A6 Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory JIS B5 default setting Letter From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Cassette for Multipurpose Feeder Size to appear as a menu Notes Legal The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size Executive Make sure to set the paper size value Oficio Mexico Folio Statement Universal 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu EEE Understanding the printer menus Multipurpose Feeder Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Envelope Rough Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Custom Type x 135 Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder Notes Plain Paper is the factory default setting From the Paper menu set Configure to Cassette for Multipurpose Feeder Type to appear as a menu Manual Paper Size A4 A
116. Make sure that the paper size type and weight are set correctly on the computer or control panel Flex fan and straighten specialty media before loading them The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser For more information on card stock and labels see the Card Stock amp Label Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com Using specialty media Tips on using letterhead Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities Before loading letterhead flex fan and straighten the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead For information on how to load letterhead see Loading trays on page 53 Loading the multipurpose feeder on page 58 Tips on using transparencies Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities Feed transparencies from the standard tray or the multipurpose feeder Usetransparencies designed specifically for laser printers Transparencies must be able to withstand temperatures up to 185 C 365 F without melting discoloring offsetting or releasing hazardous emissions Note If the transparency weight is set to Heavy and the transparency texture is set to Rough in the Paper menu then transparencies can be printed at a temperature up
117. Network Setup gt IPv6 Network Ports menu Network x Network x Setup IPv6 Note This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers Understanding the printer menus 148 Use To Enable IPv6 Enable IPv6 in the printer On Note On is the factory default setting Off Auto Configuration Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 On address configuration entries provided by a router Off Note On is the factory default setting Set Hostname Set the host name View Address Note These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server View Router Address Enable DHCPv6 Enable DHCPv6 in the printer On Note On is the factory default setting Off Wireless menu Note This menu is available only in printers connected to an Ethernet network and printers with a wireless network adapter attached To access the menu navigate to either of the following Network Ports Standard Network Standard Network Setup Wireless Network Ports Network x Network x Setup Wireless Use To Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Establish a wireless network connection and enable network security Start Push Button Method Start PIN Method Notes Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless network when buttons on both the printer and the access point wireless router are pressed within a given period of time
118. Not Print is the factory default setting Print Collate Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies 1 1 1 2 2 2 Note 1 2 3 1 2 3 is the factory default setting 1 2 3 1 2 3 Separator Sheets Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted Off Notes Between Copies Between Jobs Off is the factory default setting Between Pages Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to 1 2 3 1 2 3 If Collate is set to 1 1 1 2 2 2 then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document Separator Source Specify the paper source for separator sheets Tray x Notes Multipurpose Feeder Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Cassette for Multipurpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting Understanding the printer menus 203 Use To Paper Saver Print multiple page images on one side of a paper Off Notes 2 Up 3 Up e Off is the factory default setting 4 Up The number selected is the number of page images that print per side 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Paper Saver Ordering Specify the positioning of multiple page images when using Pape
119. Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable resources Note None is the factory default setting Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job Note 3 is the factory default setting Auto Answer Yes No Allow the printer to answer an incoming fax job Note Yes is the factory default setting Manual Answer Code 0 9 Enter a code on the telephone number pad to begin receiving a fax Notes e Qis the factory default setting This menu item is used when the printer shares a line with a telephone Auto Reduction On Off Paper Source Auto Tray x Multipurpose Feeder Sides Duplex Off On Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax source Note On is the factory default setting Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs Note Auto is the factory default setting Enable two sided printing for incoming fax jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Separator Sheets Off Before Job After Job Separator Sheet Source Tray x Multipurpose Feeder 181 To Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Specify the paper source for the separator sheet Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Output Bin Specify a bin for received faxes
120. Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network when a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the access point Enable Disable WPS Auto detection Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with Enable WPS uses Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method Disable Note Disable is the factory default setting Network Mode Specify the network mode BSS Type Notes Infrastructure Ad hoc Infrastructure is the factory default setting This lets the printer access a network using an access point Ad hoc configures a wireless connection directly between the printer and a computer Understanding the printer menus 149 Use LES Compatibility Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network 802 11b g Note The 802 11b g n is the factory default setting 802 11b g n Choose Network Select an available network for the printer to use View Signal Quality View the quality of the wireless connection View Security Mode View the encryption method for the wireless network J AppleTalk menu To access the menu navigate to either of the following e Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt AppleTalk Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt AppleTalk Activate Enable or disable AppleTalk support Yes Note No is the factory default setting No View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name No
121. a brochure Black White Laser The original document was printed using a mono laser printer Photo Film The original document is a photo from film e Newspaper The original document is from a newspaper Other The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Save As Shortcut This option lets you save the current settings by assigning a shortcut number Using the advanced options Select from the following settings Advanced Imaging This adjusts the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail and Sharpness settings before you scan the document Custom Job This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job Edge Erase This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Transmission Log This prints the transmission log or transmission error log e Adjust ADF Skew This straightens scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF tray Note This option is supported only in select printer models E mailing 95 E mailing Automatic document feeder ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages s
122. access door Additional printer setup 43 Installing hardware options Order of installation A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes then you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters Install the printer and any hardware options you have purchased in the following order Printer stand Optional 250 or 550 sheet tray Printer For more information on installing a printer stand optional 250 or 550 sheet tray or spacer see the setup sheet that came with the option Installing optional trays A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUT
123. ace all originals if restarting job 265 Replace cartridge O estimated pages remain 88 xy 265 Replace defective imaging unit 31 xy 265 Replace imaging unit O estimated pages remain 84 xy 265 Replace maintenance kit O estimated pages remain 80 xy 265 Replace unsupported cartridge 32 xy 266 Replace unsupported imaging unit 32 xy 266 Restore held jobs 266 Scanner automatic feeder cover open 266 Scanner disabled by admin 840 01 266 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists 840 02 267 Scanner jam remove all originals from the scanner 2yy xx 267 Scanner jam remove jammed originals from the scanner 2yy xx 267 Serial port x disabled 56 267 SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator 267 Some held jobs were not restored 267 Standard network software error 54 267 Standard USB port disabled 56 268 Supply needed to complete job 268 Too many flash options installed 58 268 Too many trays attached 58 268 Unformatted flash detected 53 268 Unsupported disk 268 Unsupported option in slot x 55 269 Unsupported USB hub please remove 258 USB port x disabled 56 269 Weblink server not set up Contact system administrator 269 printer options troubleshooting internal option is not detected 272 Internal Solutions Port 274 342 memory card 274 tray problems 273 USB parallel interface card 274 printer problems solving basic 2
124. ace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Is the print still too light Skewed print Contact customer support The problem is solved Troubleshooting Action Step 1 a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded b Resend the print job Is the print still skewed Step 2 a Check if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the tray b Resend the print job Yes Go to step 2 Contact customer support Is the print still skewed 295 The problem is solved The problem is solved Printer is printing solid black pages gt Action Step 1 a Reinstall the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 2 Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the printer printing solid black pages Yes Go to step 2 No The problem is solved Step 2 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Is the printer printing solid black pages support Contact customer The problem is solved Troubleshooting Transparency print quality is poor Action Step 1 From the printer control panel set the paper type in the Paper menu
125. actory default setting Cassette configures the multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual feed print jobs First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source Understanding the printer menus 137 Substitute Size menu Use LS Substitute Size Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available Off Notes Statement A5 Letter A4 All Listed is the factory default setting All available substitutions are allowed All Listed e Off indicates no size substitutions are allowed Setting a substitution lets the job print without a Change Paper message appearing Paper Texture menu Use To Plain Texture Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Card Stock Texture Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded Smooth Notes Normal Rough Normal is the factory default setting The options appear only if card stock is supported Transparency Texture Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Recycled Texture Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Labels Texture Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded Smooth Note Normal is the factory d
126. age Off Notes Onis the factory default setting f PCL SmartSwitch is disabled then the printer does not examine incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it On regardless of the default printer language Off Notes On is the factory default setting f PS SmartSwitch is disabled then the printer does not examine incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu Understanding the printer menus Use NPA Mode Off Auto 145 To Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes Auto is the factory default setting The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the control panel Network Buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Job Buffering Off On Auto Set the size of the network input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and USB buffers The printer automatically restarts when the setting is ch
127. aging unit O estimated pages remain 84 xy 265 Replace maintenance kit O estimated pages remain 80 xy 265 Replace unsupported cartridge 32 xy 266 Replace unsupported imaging unit 32 xy 266 replacing imaging unit 229 toner cartridge 227 replacing supplies staple cartridge 231 replacing the staple cartridge 231 reports viewing 235 Reports menu 143 reserve print jobs 80 printing from a Macintosh computer 81 printing from Windows 81 resolution e mail options 99 fax options 123 scan options 130 resolution fax changing 119 Restore held jobs 266 restoring factory default settings 237 RJ 11 adapter 111 S safety information 7 8 save as shortcut copy options 94 scan options 129 saving paper 90 scan image output file type 130 scan options darkness 130 file name 129 original size 129 page setup 131 resolution 130 save as shortcut 129 scan preview 131 Send As 130 scan preview fax options 123 scan options 131 Scan screen content source 130 content type 130 Scan to Computer setting up 128 Scan to Network setting up 24 using 125 scan troubleshooting cannot scan from a computer 315 partial document or photo scans 315 scan job was not successful 312 scanner unit does not close 302 313 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 313 ScanBack Utility using 129 scanner automatic document feeder ADF 14 functions 14 scanner glass 14 Scanner automatic feeder cover open 266 Scanner disable
128. ains mixed paper sizes into a single file Notes Off is the factory default setting This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Scan Preview On Off Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs Notes Off is the factory default setting This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Understanding the printer menus Use Background Removal 4 to 4 Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue 179 To Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast 0 5 Best for content Mirror Image Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specify the contrast in the scanned image Note Best for content is the factory default setting Create a mirror image of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Negative Image Create a negative image of the original document Off Note Off is the factory
129. ait and Ready appear on the printer display The problem is solved Turn off the printer and then contact customer support a E Troubleshooting Option problems Cannot detect internal option Action Step 1 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn on the printer Does the internal option operate correctly Yes The problem is solved 272 Go to step 2 Print a menu settings page and then check to see if the internal option is listed in the Installed Features list Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page Step 2 Go to step 3 Connect the internal Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller board option to the controller a Turnoffthe printer using the power switch and then unplug the power paara cord from the electrical outlet b Make sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate connector in the controller board c Connect the power cord to the printer then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn on the printer Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board Step 3 Go to step 4 Reinstall the internal option Step 4 a Check if the internal option is selected It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs For more information see a Adding available options in the print driver on page
130. al Setup Settings General Settings Copy Settings Fax Settings E mail Settings FTP Settings Flash Drive Menu OCR Settings Print Settings Reports Menu Settings Page Device Statistics Stapler Test Network Setup Page Network x Setup Page Shortcut List Fax Job Log Fax Call Log Copy Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Profiles List Print Fonts Print Directory Asset Report Event Log Summary Help Print All Guides Copy Guide E mail Guide Fax Guide FTP Guide Print Defects Guide Information Guide Supplies Guide Network Ports Active NIC Standard Network Standard USB Parallel x Serial x SMTP Setup Manage Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Copy Shortcuts Profile Shortcuts 132 Security Edit Security Settings Miscellaneous Security Settings Confidential Print Menu Erase Temporary Data Files Security Audit Log Set Date and Time Option Card Menu A list of installed DLEs Download Emulators appears 1 Depending on the printer setup this menu appears as Network Setup Page or Network x Setup Page Depending on the printer setup this menu appears as Standard Network or Network x 3 This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed Understanding the printer menus 133 Paper menu Default Source menu Use To Default Source Set a default paper source for all print jobs Tray x Notes Multipurpose Feed
131. analog telephone wall jack 3 Connect your analog telephone to the port of the printer Scenario 5 Countries or regions with different telephone wall jacks and plugs Some countries or regions may have different types of telephone wall jack connectors than those that came with the printer The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ 11 Your printer comes with the RJ 11 jack and a telephone cable with the RJ 11 plug Faxing 112 If the wall jack or equipment in your facility is not compatible with this type of connection then you need to use a telephone adapter An adapter for your country or region may not come with your printer and you may need to purchase it separately 4 There may be an adapter plug installed in the port of the printer If you are using a telephone adapter or a facility that has a cascaded or serial wiring scheme then do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer Part name Part number Lexmark adapter plug 40X8519 Faxing 113 Connecting the printer to a non RJ 11 wall jack 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with printer to the 4 port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ 11 adapter and then connect the adapter to the wall jack 3 If you want to connect another device telephone or answering machine to the same wall jack and if the device has a non RJ 11 connector then connect it directly
132. anged from the control panel Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing This menu only appears when a formatted disk is installed Notes e Off is the factory default setting The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the control panel The menu selection is then updated Mac Binary PS On Off Auto Standard Network Setup OR Network x Setup Reports Network Card TCP IP IPv6 Wireless AppleTalk Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Note Auto is the factory default setting Show and set the printer network settings Note The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network Reports menu To access the menu navigate to either of the following Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt Reports Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Reports Understanding the printer menus 146 Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address Network Card menu To access the menu navigate to either of the following Network Ports Standard Network Standard Network Setup Network Card Network Ports Network x Network x Setup Network Card View Card Status View the connection status of the wireless network adapter Connected Disconnected
133. aper orientation 261 Load Manual Feeder with custom string paper orientation 262 Load Manual Feeder with custom type name paper orientation 261 Load Manual Feeder with paper size paper orientation 262 Load manual feeder with paper type paper size paper orientation 262 loading multipurpose feeder 58 trays 53 loading the optional tray 53 loading the standard tray 53 M maintenance kit ordering 226 Maintenance kit low 80 xy 262 Maintenance kit nearly low 80 xy 262 Maintenance kit very low x estimated pages remain 80 xy 262 making copies using paper from selected tray 87 memory types installed on printer 219 memory card 27 installing 29 troubleshooting 274 Memory full 38 263 Memory full cannot print faxes 263 Memory full cannot send faxes 263 menu settings page printing 52 menus Active NIC 144 AppleTalk 149 Confidential Print 159 Configure MP 136 Copy Settings 170 Custom Names 141 Custom Scan Sizes 142 Custom Types 141 Default Source 133 Edit Security Setups 156 Erase Temporary Data Files 159 E mail Settings 185 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup 174 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup 183 Finishing 202 Flash Drive 194 FTP Settings 190 General Settings 163 Help 212 HTML 210 Image 211 IPv6 147 Job Accounting 204 list of 132 Miscellaneous Security Settings 158 Network x 144 339 Network Card 146 Network Reports 145 OCR Settings 199 Paper Loading 140 Paper Size Type 133 Paper Texture
134. appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings 3 From the Other Settings menu click E mail Alert Setup 4 Select the items you want to be notified on and then type the e mail addresses 5 Click Submit Note For information on setting up the e mail server contact your system support person Viewing reports You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer network and supplies 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Managing the printer 236 Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Reports and then click the type of report you want to view Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low low very low or reach their end of life by setting the selectable alerts Notes Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge imaging unit and maintenance kit All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low low and very low supply conditions Not all selectab
135. arch the address book 5 Touch Done Customizing e mail settings Adding e mail subject and message information 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient s gt type the e mail address gt Done 4 Touch Subject then type the e mail subject and then touch Done 5 Touch Message then type your message and then touch Done Changing the output file type 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient s gt type the e mail address gt Done gt Send as E mailing 99 3 Select the file type you want to send Note If you select Secure PDF then you will be prompted to enter your password twice 4 Touch P Send It Canceling an e mail When using the ADF touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page Finish the Job appears Understanding the e mail options Recipient s This option lets
136. ation problems An application error has occurred Action Step 1 Check the system log for relevant details a Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer home screen Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and then locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 b Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management gt System tab gt Log c From the Filter menu select an application status d From the Application menu select an application and then click Submit Does an error message appear in the log Yes Go to step 2 316 Contact customer support Step 2 Resolve the error Is the application working now Embedded Web Server does not open Action Step 1 Make sure the printer IP address is correct View the printer IP address From the printer home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Is the printer IP address correct The problem is solved Yes Go to step 2 Contact customer support Type the co
137. ative for additional suggestions The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Note To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing device use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to Director of Lexmark Technology amp Services Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 859 232 3000 Noise emission levels The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296 Notices 320 Note Some modes may not apply to your product 1 meter average sound pressure dBA Printing 55 one sided 54 two sided Scanning Copying Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Temperature information Ambient operating temperature 15 6 to 32 2 C 60 to 90 F Shipping temperature 40 to 43 3 C 40 to 110 F Storage temperature and relative humidity 1 to
138. atterns then you may have to change the default setting There are two settings available FSK pattern 1 and DTMF pattern 2 The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns Contact your telephone company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use Does the caller ID appear Yes The problem is solved 306 Contact customer support M Cannot send or receive a fax Action Step 1 Check if an error or status message appears on the display Is there an error or status message on the display Yes Clear the error or status message No Go to step 2 Check the printer connections If applicable check if the cable connections for the following equipment are secure Telephone Handset Answering machine Are the cable connections secure Step 2 Go to step 3 Connect the power Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly cord to the printer and grounded electrical outlet a properly grounded electrical outlet Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Step 3 Go to step 4 Turn on the printer Check the power and then wait until Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on and if Ready appears red appears on the on the display ISP Is the printer turned on and does Ready appear on the disp
139. b Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper Step 3 a Depending on your operating system open Printing Preferences or the Print dialog and then specify the paper type b Resend the print job Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper Step 4 a Check if the trays are not linked b Resend the print job Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper Yes The problem is solved The problem is solved The problem is solved The problem is solved 281 No Go to step 2 Go to step 3 Go to step 4 Contact customer support Incorrect characters print Action Step 1 Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode Note If Ready Hex appears on the printer display then turn off the printer and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode Is the printer in Hex Trace mode Step 2 a From the printer control panel select Standard Network or Network x and then set SmartSwitch to On b Resend the print job Do incorrect characters print Yes Deactivate Hex Trace mode Contact customer support a No Go to step 2 The problem is solved Troubleshooting Tray linking does not work Notes The trays can detect paper length The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size You must set the size from the Paper Size Type menu Action Step 1
140. be scanned for inclusion in the e mail Orientation This specifies the orientation of the original document and then changes the Sides Duplex and Binding settings to match the orientation Binding This specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side E mailing 101 Scan Preview This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e mail When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Note This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed Using the advanced options Select from the following settings Advanced Imaging This adjusts the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail and Sharpness settings before you e mail the document Custom Job This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job Edge Erase This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Transmission Log This prints the transmission log or transmission error log Adjust ADF Skew This straightens scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF tray Note This option is supported only in select
141. bin 45y xx Open the finisher rear door and then remove the jammed paper Open the narrow door and then remove the jammed paper Move the left paper guide to the left and the right paper guide to the right and then remove the jammed paper from the finisher bin Open the finisher rear door and the narrow door and then remove any jammed pages x page jam open automatic feeder top cover 28y xx 1 Remove all original documents from the ADF tray Note The message is cleared when the pages are removed from the ADF tray 2 Open the ADF cover 3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the ADF cover Clearing jams 241 5 Straighten the edges of the original documents then load the documents into the ADF and then adjust the paper guide 6 From the printer control panel touch Done to clear the message and continue printing x page jam clear standard bin 20y xx 1 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Mm 2 From the printer control panel touch Done to clear the message and continue printing x page jam open rear door 20y xx 1 Open the front door to loosen the jammed paper in the rear door 2 Gently pull down the rear door A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce th
142. c nyilatkozom hogy a term k megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b el r sainak slenska H r me l sir Lexmark International Inc yfir v a essi vara er samr mi vi grunnkr fur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru tilskipun 1999 5 EC Notices 331 Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International Inc dichiara che questo questo prodotto conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latviski Ar o Lexmark International Inc deklar ka Sis izstr d jums atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK b tiskaj m prasibam un citiem ar to saistitajjem noteikumiem Lietuvi iuo Lexmark International Inc deklaruoja kad Sis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB direktyvos nuostatas Malti Bil pre enti Lexmark International Inc jiddikjara li dan il prodott huwa konformi mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma dispo izzjonijiet o rajn relevanti li jinsabu fid Direttiva 1999 5 KE Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International Inc dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Norsk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International Inc o wiadcza
143. can Bit Depth 1 bit 8 bit File Name Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality Note 50 is the factory default setting Provide a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to FTP job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page Note On is the factory default setting Enable the Text Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Type a base file name Custom Job Scanning On Off Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes Note Off is the factory default setting Scan Preview On Off Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Background Removal 4to4 Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Enable an equal balance of colors in the output Understanding the printer menus Use Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 197 To Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the fac
144. cedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides Faxing 117 3 From the home screen touch Fax 4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut Note To add recipients touch Next number and then enter the recipient s telephone number or shortcut number or search the address book 5 Touch Fax It Sending a fax using the computer For Windows users 1 With a document open click File gt Print 2 Select the printer and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup 3 Click Fax gt Enable fax and then enter the recipient fax number or numbers 4 If necessary configure other fax settings 5 Apply the changes and then send the fax job Notes The fax option is available only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver For more information go to http support lexmark com To use the fax option with the PostScript driver configure and enable it in the Configuration tab For Macintosh users 1 With a document open choose File gt Print 2 Select the printer 3 Enter the recipient fax number and then configure other fax settings if necessary 4 Send the fax job Sending a fax using a short
145. ch is set to Off Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes e Auto is the factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then process it appropriately The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer control panel The menu selection is then updated Set the size of the USB input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1 K increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer control panel The menu selection is then updated Job Buffering Off On Auto Mac Binary PS On Off Auto Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing Notes Off is the factory default setting On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
146. changes Printing a document 1 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded 2 Sendthe print job For Windows users a With a document open click File Print b Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup c Adjust the settings if necessary d Click OK Print For Macintosh users a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog 1 With a document open choose File Page Setup 2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded 3 Click OK b Customize the settings in the Print dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the Print dialog and pop up menus adjust the settings if necessary Note To print on a specific paper type adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded or select the appropriate tray or feeder 3 Click Print Adjusting toner darkness 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Printing 78 Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Print Settings Quality Menu Toner Darkness 3 Adjust the toner darkness and then click Submit Using the pr
147. cify the e mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs Specify the prefix you want for the log file name Note The current host name defined in the TCP IP menu is used as the default log file prefix Understanding the printer menus 206 Utilities menu Use To Remove Held Jobs Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk Confidential Notes Held Not Restored Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer All Bookmarks print jobs on flash drives and other types of held jobs are not affected Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the printer hard disk or memory Format Flash Format the flash memory Yes Warning Potential Damage Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is No being formatted Notes Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory Nocancels the format request Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in the printer The flash memory option card must not be read write or write protected This menu item appears only when a non defective flash memory card is installed Delete Downloads on Disk Delete downloads from the printer hard disk including all held jobs buffered jobs Delete Now and parked jobs Do Not Delete Notes Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to return to the originating screen after the d
148. ct Best for Content if you want the printer to adjust the contrast automatically Default scale setting Set the size of the scanned card when printed The default setting is 10096 full size Resolution setting Adjust the quality of the scanned card Notes When scanning a card make sure the scan resolution is not more than 200 dpi for color and 400 dpi for black and white When scanning multiple cards make sure the scan resolution is not more than 150 dpi for color and 300 dpi for black and white Print Borders Select the check box to print the scan image with a border around it 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Card Copy on the printer home screen and then follow the instructions Using MyShortcut Note A later version of this User s Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator s Guide of this application To check for updates of this User s Guide go to http support lexmark com Setting up and using the home screen applications 24 Use To Create shortcuts on the printer home screen with settings for up to 25 frequently used copy fax or e mail jobs To use the application touch MyShortcut and then follow the instructions on the printer display Setting up Multi Send Note A later version of this User s Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator s Guide of this application To check for updates of this User s Guide go to http support le
149. cut number Fax shortcuts are like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or a fax machine A shortcut number 1 999 can contain asingle recipient or multiple recipients 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the printer control panel press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad 4 Touch Fax It Faxing 118 Sending a fax using the address book The address book lets you search for bookmarks and network directory servers For more information on enabling the address book feature contact your system support person 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax 4 gt type the name of
150. d by admin 840 01 266 343 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists 840 02 267 scanner glass cleaning 224 copying using 85 Scanner jam remove all originals from the scanner 2yy xx 267 Scanner jam remove jammed originals from the scanner 2yy xx 267 scanning from a flash drive 128 quick copy 84 to a computer using the Embedded Web Server 127 to an FTP address 126 scanning to a computer 128 using the Embedded Web Server 127 scanning to a flash drive 128 scanning to an FTP address creating shortcuts using the computer 125 using a shortcut number 126 using the address book 126 using the printer control panel 126 scanning to network destinations 125 Schedule Power Modes using 216 security modifying confidential print settings 81 Security Audit Log menu 160 security slot 46 security Web page printer security information 222 selecting a location for the printer 10 selecting paper 70 Send As e mail options 100 scan options 130 sending a fax using the computer 117 sending a fax using the printer control panel 116 sending an e mail using the printer control panel 97 Index sending fax using shortcuts 117 using the address book 118 sending fax at a scheduled time 118 sending fax using the address book 118 Serial x menu 153 Serial port x disabled 56 267 serial printing setting up 52 Set Date Time menu 161 setting TCP IP address 146 setting Hibernate Timeout 215 settin
151. d disk is installed Save e mail addresses as shortcuts Notes Onisthe factory default setting When set to Off the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e mail destination screen LLLLLL 4 Understanding the printer menus Use Background Removal 4to4 Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue 189 To Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Enable an equal balance of colors in the output Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast 0 5 Best for content Mirror Image Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specify the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Create a mirror image of the original document Scan edge to edge Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Negative Image
152. d parameter assignment On Note On is the factory default setting Off Enable RARP Specify the RARP address assignment setting On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Enable BOOTP Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting On Note On is the factory default setting Off Enable AutoIP Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Enable FTP TFTP Enablethe built in FTP server which lets you send filestothe printer using File Transfer Yes Protocol No Note Yes is the factory default setting Enable HTTP Server Enable the built in Web server Embedded Web Server When enabled the printer Yes can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser No Note Yes is the factory default setting WINS Server Address View or change the current WINS server address Enable DDNS View or change the current DDNS setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Enable mDNS View or change the current mDNS setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No DNS Server Address View or change the current DNS server address Backup DNS Server Address View or change the backup DNS server addresses Backup DNS Server Address 2 Backup DNS Server Address 3 Enable HTTPS View or change the current HTTPS setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No IPv6 menu To access the menu navigate to any of the following Network Ports menu gt Standard Network gt Standard
153. d points produces the best print quality Paper and specialty media guide 70 Moisture content The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 48 hours before printing Extend the time to several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period Grain direction Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper Grain is either grain long running the length of the paper or grain short running the width of the paper For 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib bond paper grain long paper is recommended Fiber content Most high quality xerographic paper is made from 10096 chemically treated pulped wood This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting infewer paper feeding problems and better print quality Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling Unacceptable paper The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper also known as carbonless pa
154. d special symbols Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text Only the supported symbol sets are shown Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts Notes 12isthe factory default setting Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font One point equals approximately 0 014 of an inch This can be increased or decreased in 0 25 point increments PCL Emulation Settings Pitch 0 08 100 00 Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts Notes 10 is the factory default setting Pitch refers to the number of fixed space characters per inch cpi This can be increased or decreased in 0 01 cpi increments For non scalable monospaced fonts the pitch appears on the display but cannot be changed PCL Emulation Settings Orientation Portrait Landscape Specify the orientation of text and graphics on a page Notes Portrait is the factory default setting It prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page Understanding the printer menus Use PCL Emulation Settings Lines per Page 1 255 209 To Specify the number of lines that print on each page Notes 60 is the US factory default setting 64 is the international default setting The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines
155. d to wireless network cards or proximity card readers Modular component notice Wireless equipped models contain the following modular component s Lexmark Regulatory Type Model Number LEX M01 005 FCC ID IYLLEXMO1005 IC 2376A M01005 Exposure to radio frequency radiation The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies A minimum separation of 20 cm 8 inches must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies Industry Canada Canada Under Industry Canada regulations this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum or lesser gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada To reduce potential radio interference to other users the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power EIRP is not more than that necessary for successful communication This device complies with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standards Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device To prevent radio interference to the licensed service this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum
156. ddress appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly Click Settings General Settings Schedule Power Modes From the Action menu select the power mode From the Time menu select the time From the Day s menu select the day or days a u F amp F WU N Click Add Adjusting the brightness of the printer display To save energy or if you have trouble reading the display adjust its brightness settings Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Saving money and the environment 217 Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings General Settings 3 In the Screen Brightness field enter the brightness percentage you want for the display 4 Click Submit Recycling Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling For more information see The Notices chapter The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle Recycling Lexmark p
157. de Scan Preview This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e mail When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Note This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed Using the advanced options Select from the following settings Advanced Imaging This adjusts the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you scan the document Custom Job This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job Edge Erase This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Transmission Log This prints the transmission log or transmission error log Multifeed Sensor This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time and then shows an error message Note This option is supported only in select printer models Understanding the printer menus Understanding the printer menus Menus list Paper Menu Default Source Paper Size Type Configure MP Substitute Size Paper Texture Paper Weight Paper Loading Custom Types Custom Names Custom Scan Sizes Univers
158. defects distance between the defects equal to 80 mm 3 15 in 2 Take note of the Check for a distance between the defects that equals 97 mm 3 82 in 47 mm 1 85 in distance and then e 38 mm 1 5 in contact customer support at http support le xmark com or your service representative Is the distance between defects equal to one of the listed measurements Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job support at http support lexma l rk com or your service Do the repeating defects still appear us representative M J Troubleshooting Print is too dark N ABC DEF Action Step 1 a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel reduce the toner darkness Note 8 is the factory default setting b Resend the print job Is the print still too dark Step 2 a From the printer control panel set the paper type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray b Resend the print job Is the tray set to the type texture and weight of the paper loaded Step 3 a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Is the print still too dark Yes Go to step 2 Go to step 3 Go to step 4 292 No The problem is solved Do one or more of the following
159. dge Alarm Stapler Alarm For each alarm type select from the following options Off Single Continuous Notes Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control This sounds three quick beeps Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm and Stapler Alarm Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds Understanding the printer menus Use Timeouts Standby Mode Disabled 1 240 Timeouts Sleep Mode Disabled 1 120 Timeouts Print with Display Off Allow printing with display off Display on when printing Timeouts Hibernate Timeout Disabled 20 minutes 1 3 hours 6 hours 1 3 days 1 2 weeks 1 month Hibernate Timeout on Connection Hibernate Do Not Hibernate Timeouts Screen Timeout 15 300 Timeouts Prolong Screen Timeout On Off 168 To Set the amount of time before the printer enters a lower power state Note 15 minutes is the factory default setting Set the amount of time in minutes the printer waits after a job is printed before it goes into a reduced power state Notes 20 minutes is the factory default setting Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to Off Lower settings conserve more energy but may require longer warm up times Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use Under most circumstances this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm up time Print a job with the display turned off Note Display on w
160. dings specifies how line endings will be handled in the log file depending on the operating system in which the file will be parsed or viewed Log line endings u i LF n is the factory default setting LF n CR V CRLF r n Set Date Time menu Use To Current Date and Time View the current date and time settings for the printer Manually Set Date and Time Enter the date and time Note Date Time is set in YYYY MM DD HH MM SS format Time Zone Select the time zone Note GMT is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Automatically Observe DST On Off 162 To Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time DST start and end times associated with the printer Time Zone setting Note On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time associated with the Time Zone setting Custom Time Zone Setup DST Start Week DST Start Day DST Start Month DST Start Time DST End Week DST End Day DST End Month DST End Time DST Offset Enable the user to set up the time zone Enable NTP On Off Enable Network Time Protocol which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a network Note On is the factory default setting NTP Server Enable Authentication On Off a ee View the NTP server address Change the authentication setting to On or Off Note Off is the factory default setting U
161. e and continue printing For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Note If you do not have a replacement cartridge then see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Replace unsupported imaging unit 32 xy Remove the imaging unit and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Note If you do not have a replacement imaging unit then see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Restore held jobs Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk From the printer control panel touch Do not restore if you do not want to restore any of the print jobs Scanner automatic feeder cover open Close the ADF cover Scanner disabled by admin 840 01 Print without the scanner or contact your system support person Troubleshooting 267 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists 840 02 Try one or more of the following Touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen and then contact your system support person Touch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cance
162. e imaging unit see the instruction sheet that came with the supply Part number Imaging unit 24B6040 Part number Staple cartridges 35S8500 Ordering a maintenance kit Notes Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit The separator roller fuser pick rollers transfer roller and redrive assembly are all included in the maintenance kit and can be individually ordered and replaced if necessary Contact your service representative to replace the maintenance kit Maintenance kit Part number 100 V maintenance kit 110 V maintenance kit 220 V maintenance kit This is available only in Japan NS Ordering an ADF separator roller Order an ADF separator roller when the ADF fails to pick paper or picks more than one sheet of paper at a time For information on replacing the ADF separator roller see the instruction sheet that came with the part Part name Part number Separator roller 40X9108 Estimated number of remaining pages The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer Its accuracy may vary significantly and is dependent on many factors such as actual document content print quality settings and other printer settings Maintaining the printer 227 The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption is differentfrom t
163. e it u available for print jobs For more information see Adding available options in the print driver on page 46 Is the tray available in the printer driver N Troubleshooting Cannot detect memory card Action Make sure the memory card is installed a Install the memory card For more information see Installing a memory card on page 29 Note Check if the memory card is securely connected to the printer controller board b Print a menu settings page and then check if the card is listed in the Installed Options list Is the card listed in the Installed Options list Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly Action Step 1 Make sure the Internal Solutions Port ISP is installed a Install the ISP For more information see Installing an Internal Solutions Port on page 32 b Printa menu settings page and then check if the ISP is listed in the Installed Features list Is the ISP listed in the Installed Features list Step 2 Check the cable and the ISP connection a Use the correct cable and then make sure it is securely connected to the ISP b Checkifthe ISP solution interface cable is securely connected into the receptacle of the controller board Note The ISP solution interface cable and the receptacle on the controller board are color coded Does the Internal Solutions Port operate correctly M Yes The problem is solved Yes Go to s
164. e niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portugu s A Lexmark International Inc declara que este este produto est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Diretiva 1999 5 CE Slovensky Lexmark International Inc t mto vyhlasuje e tento produkt sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia smernice 1999 5 ES Slovensko Lexmark International Inc izjavlja da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 ES Svenska H rmed intygar Lexmark International Inc att denna produkt st r i verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS LEXMARK LED PRINTERS AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS Lexmark International Inc Lexington KY This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada For customers outside the U S refer to the country specific warranty information that came with your product This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use and not for resale from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer referred to in this statement as Remarketer Limited warranty Lexmark warrants that this product s manufactured from new parts or new and ser
165. e printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack RJ 11 DSL filter or VoIP adapter or any other adapter that allows you to access the telephone line to send and receive faxes Attach a supported printer keyboard 7 USB printer port 8 Security slot Connect the printer to a computer Attach a lock that will secure the printer in place Additional printer setup 48 Networking Notes Purchase a MarkNet N8350 wireless network adapter before setting up the printer on a wireless network For information on installing the wireless network adapter see the instruction sheet that came with the adapter AService Set Identifier SSID is a name assigned to a wireless network Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA2 and 802 1X RADIUS are types of security used on a network Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network organize the following information before you begin Note If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers continue on to installing the printer Avalid unique IP address for the printer to use on the network The network gateway The network mask Anickname for the printer optional Note A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network You can choose to use the default printer nickname or assign a name that is
166. e problem is solved a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Firmly shake the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Reinstall the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints Step 5 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job support Do vertical voids appear on prints M Toner specks appear on prints Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Contact customer The problem is solved support Do toner specks appear on prints Toner fog or background shading appears on prints Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved Reinstall the imaging unit a Remove and then install the imaging unit b Resend the print job Does fog or shading appear on prints Troubleshooting 301 Action Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job support at http support lexmar k com or your service representative Does fog or shading appear on prints Toner rubs off Leading edge Trailing edge Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Specify the paper type From the Paper
167. e risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching it Clearing jams 242 3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the front and rear door 5 From the printer control panel select Done to clear the message and continue printing Clearing jams 243 x page jam open front door 20y xx A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching it 1 Press the button on the right side of the printer and then open the front door 2 Pull out the toner cartridge using the handle Clearing jams 244 3 Lift the green handle and then pull out the imaging unit from the printer Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the shiny blue photoconductor drum under the imaging unit Doing so may affect the quality of future print jobs 4 Place the imaging unit aside on a flat smooth surface Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 5 Lift the green flap in front of the printer 6 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Clearing jams 245 Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 7 Insert the imaging unit by aligning the arrows o
168. e to Copy enter the number of copies Collate select the preferred order of pages ZS gt Copy It Placing separator sheets between copies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy Advanced Options Separator Sheets Note Set Collate to 1 2 3 1 2 3 to place separator sheets between copies If Collate is set to 1 1 1 2 2 2 then the separator sheets are added to the end of the copy job For more information see Collating copies on page 89 4 Select one of the following Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Off 5 Touch Y Copy It Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet In order to save paper you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto a single sheet of paper Copying 91 Notes Make sure to set the paper size to letter legal A4 or JIS B5 Make sure to set the copy size to 10096 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes
169. e type texture and weight of the paper loaded Go to step 3 Change the paper type texture and weight to match the paper loaded in the tray Step 3 a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Is the print still too light Go to step 4 The problem is solved Troubleshooting Action Step 4 Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes Are you printing on textured or rough paper Yes From the printer control panel change the texture settings in the Paper Texture menu to match the paper you are printing on 294 No Go to step 5 Step 5 a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Is the print still too light Step 6 a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Firmly shake the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the print still too light Go to step 6 Go to step 7 The problem is solved The problem is solved Step 7 Repl
170. eal envelopes Tips on using labels Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities Note Use only paper label sheets Vinyl pharmacy and two sided labels are not supported For more information on label printing characteristics and design see the Card Stock amp Label Guide available at http support lexmark com When printing on labels Use labels designed specifically for laser printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that The labels can withstand temperatures up to 230 C 446 F without sealing excessive curling wrinkling or releasing hazardous emissions Label adhesives face sheet printable stock and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi 172 kPa pressure without delaminating oozing around the edges or releasing hazardous fumes Do not use labels with slick backing material Use full label sheets Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing resulting in a jam Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive and could void the printer and toner cartridge warranties Do not use labels with exposed adhesive Do not print within 1 mm 0 04 inches of the edge of the label of the perforations or between die cuts of the label Make sure the adhesive backing does not reach to the edge of the sheet Zone coating of the adhesive should be at least 1 mm 0 04 inches away from edges Adhesive material conta
171. eans the reset has no effect on the printer security configuration e Access controls No Security retains all the security information that the user has defined No Security is the factory default setting Reset factory security defaults deletes all security information that the user has defined and restores the factory default settings in the Miscellaneous Security menu LDAP Certificate Verification Allow the user to request a server certificate Demand Notes Try Allow Demand is the factory default setting This means a server certificate is requested If a bad certificate is provided or if no certificate is provided then Never n the session is terminated immediately Try means a server certificate is requested If no certificate is provided then the session proceeds normally If a bad certificate is provided then the session is terminated immediately Allow means a server certificate is requested If no certificate is provided then the session proceeds normally If a bad certificate is provided then it will be ignored and the session proceeds normally Never means no server certificate is requested Minimum PIN Length Limit the digit length of the personal identification number PIN 1 16 Note 4 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 159 Confidential Print menu Use To Max Invalid PIN Set a limit on the number of times an invalid PIN can be enter
172. easier for you to remember You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can physically connect to the network Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a damaged cable Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network Notes Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter Make sure your access point wireless router is turned on and is working properly Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network SSID The SSID is also referred to as the network name Wireless Mode or Network Mode The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc Channel for ad hoc networks The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select Additional printer setup 49 Security Method There are four basic options for Security Method WEP key If your network uses more than one WEP key then enter up to four in the provided spaces Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase WPA includes encryption as an additiona
173. ecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors To obtain the highest projected color quality transmissive overhead projectors are recommended Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Set the paper type to From the printer control panel make sure the paper type setting is set to Transparency Transparency Is the paper type setting correct Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 Reduce the toner darkness and then resend the print job Does the print on the color transparency look lighter Step 3 The problem is solved Contact customer Make sure you are using a recommended type of color transparency and support then resend the print job Does the print on the color transparency look lighter i Shadow images appear on prints EX ABCD ABCD Leading edge Trailing edge Troubleshooting 287 Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Load paper with the Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray correct paper type and weight in the tray Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray Step 2 Go to step 3 Change the paper From the printer control panel set the paper type and weight in the Paper loaded in the tray to menu to match the paper loaded in the tray match the paper type and weight specified in Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded the tray settings Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem
174. ectricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors Additional printer setup 29 1 Memory card connector 2 Option card connector 3 Printer hard disk connector 4 Lexmark Internal Solutions Port connector 4 Close the shield and then the access door Installing a memory card CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors Note An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the controller board 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 28 2 Unpack the memory card Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card Doing so may cause damage Additional printer setup 30 3 Align the notch 1 on the memory card with the ridge 2 on the connector 4 Push the memory card straight
175. ed Select the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port Notes DTR is the factory default setting DTR DSR is a hardware handshaking setting XON XOFF is a software handshaking setting XON XOFF DTR and XON XOFF DTR DSR are combined hardware and pae M a a a a a ea software handshaking settings Understanding the printer menus 155 Use To Robust XON Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer On Notes Off e Off is the factory default setting This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to XON XOFF Baud Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port 1200 Notes 2400 4800 9600 is the factory default setting 9600 138200 172800 230400 and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the 19200 Standard Serial menu These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1 Serial Option 2 or Serial Option 3 menus 38400 57600 115200 138200 172800 230400 345600 Data Bits Specify the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame 7 Note 8 is the factory default setting 8 Parity Set the parity for serial input and output data frames Even Note None is the factory default setting Odd None Ignore Honor DSR Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal On Notes Off e Off is the factory default setting DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables The serial port uses
176. ed off Notes 2 10 This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed When the limit is reached the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted Confidential Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores confidential print jobs Off Notes 1 hour 4 hours If the Confidential Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside in the printer memory or printer hard disk then the expiration time for those enous print jobs does not change to the new default value pices If the printer is turned off then all confidential jobs held in the printer memory are deleted Repeat Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Verify Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Reserve Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Note Off is the factory default setting Erase Temporary Data Files menu Erase Temporary Data Files deletes only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Note This menu appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed U
177. ed and then the home screen appears Holding and forwarding faxes Holding faxes This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup gt Holding Faxes 3 From the Held Fax Mode menu select one of the following Off Always On Manual Scheduled 4 If you selected Scheduled then continue with the following steps a Click Fax Holding Schedule b From the Action menu select Hold faxes Faxing 122 c From the Time menu select the time you want the held faxes released d From the Day s menu select the day you want the held faxes released 5 Click Add Forwarding a fax This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number e mail address FTP site or LDSS 1 u A U N Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123
178. efault setting Normal Rough Bond Texture Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded Smooth Note Rough is the factory default setting Normal Rough Envelope Texture Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Understanding the printer menus 138 Use To Rough Envelope Texture Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded Rough Letterhead Texture Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Preprinted Texture Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Colored Texture Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Light Texture Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Heavy Texture Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Rough Cotton Texture Specify the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded Rough Custom x Texture Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded Smooth Notes Normal Rough Normal is the factory default setting The options appear only if the custom type is supported V A Paper Weight menu
179. eletion Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu for touch screen printer models When selected in non touch screen printer models Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after the deletion Activate Hex Trace Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem Notes When activated all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation and control codes are not executed To exit or deactivate Hex Trace turn off or reset the printer Coverage Estimator Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page The estimate is Off printed on a separate page at the end of each print job On Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 207 XPS menu Print Error Pages Print a page containing information on errors including XML markup errors off Note Off is the factory default setting On PDF menu Scale to Fit Yes No Scale page content to fit the selected paper size Note No is the factory default setting Annotations Print annotations in a PDF Do Not Print Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting PostScript menu Print PS Error Print a page containing the PostScript error On Off Lock PS Startup Mode On Off Note Off is the factory default setting Disable the SysStart file Note
180. ely attached to the printer and the computer print server option or other network device Go to step 9 Connect the printer cable securely to the printer and the computer print server option or other network device Step 9 Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any packing material Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material removed Go to step 10 Turn off the printer remove all packing materials then reinstall the hardware options and then turn on the printer Troubleshooting Action Step 10 Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer driver Are the port settings correct Step 11 Check the installed printer driver Is the correct printer driver installed Yes Go to step 11 Go to step 12 No Use correct printer driver settings Install the correct printer driver 271 Step 12 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on Is the printer working The problem is solved Contact customer support La Printer display is blank Action Step 1 Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel Does Ready appear on the printer display Yes The problem is solved No Go to step 2 Step 2 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on Do Please w
181. en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser DANGER Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du d verrouillage des loquets Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser VAARA N kym t nt lasers teily on varottava kun v rikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki V lt lasersateelle altistumista GEFAHR Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre Laserstrahl meiden KINAYNO EkAvon aopatns aktiwoBoAias laser kata tnv ada pgon tuv KACETWV kat tnv anaop ion Ths HavSdAWOns Anope yete tnv k8gon otnv akcvofoAMa laser VESZ LY Nem l that l zersug rz s fordulhat el a patronok elt vol t sakor s a z r szerkezet felbont sakor Ker lje a l zersug rnak val kitetts get PERICOLO Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco Evitare l esposizione al raggio laser FARE Usynlig laserstr ling nar kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill Unnga eksponering for laserstralen NIEBEZPIECZENSTWO niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady Nale y unika na wietlenia promieniem lasera ONACHO Hesugumoe na3epHoe n3nyyeHne Npr u38neuenHelx Kaprpuxax n cHaTnn 6noknpoBkKn VU36eralite BO3Ae CTBNA naasepHeix Nyye Pozor Nebezpe enstvo nevidite n ho laserov ho iarenia pri odobrat ch kazet ch a odblokovanej poistke Nevystavujte sa l
182. ep 1 Check if the printer is in Fax mode From the home screen touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode and then send the fax Note The Multi Send application does not support the XPS output type To use XPS use the regular faxing method Can you send faxes Step 2 Load the original document properly Load the original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass Can you send faxes Na Yes The problem is solved The problem is solved Go to step 2 Go to step 3 Troubleshooting Action Step 3 Set up the shortcut number properly that you want to dial Dial the telephone number manually Can you send faxes Received fax has poor print quality Action Step 1 Ask the person who sent you the fax to a Checkif the quality of the original document is satisfactory b Increase the fax scan resolution if possible C Resend the fax Is the fax print quality satisfactory Step 2 Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed a Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers se
183. er Manual Paper Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting Manual Envelope From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Cassette for Multipurpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting e f two trays contain paper of the same size and type and the trays have the same settings then the trays are automatically linked When one tray is empty the print job continues using the linked tray Paper Size Type menu Tray x Size Specify the paper size loaded in each tray A4 Notes A5 A6 Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory JIS B5 default setting Letter f two trays contain paper of the same size and type and the trays have legal the same settings then the trays are automatically linked The multipurpose feeder may also be linked When one tray is empty the Executive print job continues using the linked tray Oficio Mexico The A6 paper size is supported only in Tray 1 and the multipurpose Folio feeder Statement Universal 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu Understanding the printer menus 134 Tray x Type Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Notes Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1 Custom Type x is Recycled the factory default setting for all other trays
184. er terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use This isto avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device including fax machines to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specificatio
185. er printed on mixed paper sizes Example 1 or scaled to fit a single paper size Example 2 Example 1 Copying on mixed paper sizes 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt Mixed Sizes gt ZS 4 Navigate to Copy to gt Auto Size Match gt ZS gt Copy It The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document Example 2 Copying on a single paper size 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass Copying 88 The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt Mixed S
186. er with paper size paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the feeder with the correct size of paper From the printer control panel touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing From the printer control panel touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with paper type paper size paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper From the printer control panel touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing From the printer control panel touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray Cancel the print job Maintenance kit low 80 xy You may need to order a maintenance kit For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com or contact customer support and then report the message If necessary touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Maintenance kit nearly low 80 xy For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com or contact customer support and then report the message If necessary touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Maintenance kit very low x estimated pages remain 80 xy You
187. es in each tray except the standard 550 sheet tray Tray 1 and the multipurpose feeder The Paper Size setting for Tray 1 and the multipurpose feeder must be set manually in the Paper Size menu The factory default Paper Type setting is Plain Paper The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays Configuring Universal paper settings The Universal paper size is a user defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus Notes The smallest supported Universal size is 76 2 x 76 2 mm 3 x3 inches The largest supported Universal size is 215 9 x 359 92 mm 8 5 x 14 17 inches 1 From the home screen navigate to Paper Menu Universal Setup Units of Measure select the unit of measure d 2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height 3 Select the width or height and then touch v Loading trays A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed 1 Pull out the tray completely Note Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the printer display Doing so may cause a jam Loading paper and specialty media 54 Loading paper and specialty media 55 3 Squeeze and then slide the length guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading Notes For some paper sizes like letter legal and A4 sq
188. ets you set the original document type and source Select from the following content types Text The content of the original document is mostly text or line art Text Photo The original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo The original document is mostly a photo or an image Graphics The original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Select from the following content sources Color Laser The original document was printed using a color laser printer Inkjet The original document was printed using an inkjet printer e Magazine The original document is from a magazine Brochure The original document is from a brochure Black White Laser The original document was printed using a mono laser printer Photo Film The original document is a photo from film e Newspaper The original document is from a newspaper Other The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Scanning 131 Page Setup This option lets you change the following settings Sides Duplex This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper Orientation This specifies the orientation of the original document and then changes the Sides Duplex and Binding settings to match the orientation Binding This specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge si
189. etting Enable Analog Receive Off On Enable receiving of analog faxes Note Off is the factory default setting E mail Settings menu Use E mail Server Setup Subject Message File Name a Specify e mail server information E mail Server Setup Send me a copy Never appears On by default Off by default Always On E mail Server Setup Max E mail size 0 65535 KB Send a copy of the e mail to the sender Note Never appears is the factory default setting Specify the maximum e mail size Note E mails above the specified size are not sent E mail Server Setup Size Error Message E mail Server Setup Limit destinations E mail Server Setup Web Link Setup Server Login Password Path File Name Web Link Send a message when an e mail is greater than the configured size limit Specify a domain name such as a company domain name and then limit e mail destinations only to that domain name Note You can only specify one domain Define the e mail server Web link settings Note Thecharacters areinvalid entries for a path name Understanding the printer menus Use Format PDF pdf TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps RTF rtf TXT txt PDF Settings PDF Version 1 2 1 7 A la A 1b PDF Compression Normal High Secure PDF Off On Searchable PDF Off On Content Type Text Graphics Text Photo Photo To Specify the file format No
190. ext entry Notes Do not display is the factory default setting for When to display Default is the factory default setting for Message to display Understanding the printer menus Displayed Information continued Paper Jam Load Paper Service Errors 166 Customize the displayed information for certain menus Select from the following options Display Yes No Message to display Default Alternate Default text entry Alternate text entry Notes Noisthe factory default setting for Display Default is the factory default setting for Message to display Home screen customization Change Language Copy Copy Shortcuts Fax Fax Shortcuts E mail E mail Shortcuts FTP FTP Shortcuts Search Held Jobs Held Jobs USB Drive Profiles and Apps Bookmarks Jobs by User Forms and Favorites Card Copy Scan to Network MyShortcut Multi Send Change the icons that appear on the home screen For each icon select from the following options Display Do not display Date Format MM DD YYYY DD MM YYYY YYYY MM DD Format the date Note MM DD YYYY is the U S factory default setting DD MM YYYY is the international factory default setting Time Format 12 hour A M P M 24 hour clock Format the time Note 12 hour A M P M is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Screen Brightness 20 100 One Page Copy Off On 167 To Specify the brightness of the
191. f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly Click Settings Fax Settings From the Fax Forwarding menu select Print Print and Forward or Forward From the Forward to menu select Fax E mail FTP LDSS or eSF In the Forward to Shortcut field enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded Note The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the Forward to menu Click Submit Understanding the fax options Content This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document Select from the following content types Text The content of the original document is mostly text or line art Text Photo The original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo The original document is mostly a photo or an image Graphics The original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Select from the following content sources Color Laser The original document was printed using a color laser printer Inkjet The original document was printed using an inkjet printer Magazine The original document is from a magazine Brochure The original document is from a brochure Black White Laser The original document was printed using a mono laser printer Photo Film The original document is a photo from film Newspaper The original document is from a newspaper Othe
192. formation and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu Fax data Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu Turn off the printer Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully powered up the touch screen displays a list of functions instead of the standard home screen icons Touch Wipe All Settings The printer will restart several times during this process Note Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings solutions jobs faxes and passwords from the printer memory Touch Back Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Erasing printer hard disk memory Notes Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed Configuring Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion Using the printer control panel 1 2 Turn off the printer Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully tu
193. fter the last successful scan job Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge 31 xy Try one or more of the following Check if the toner cartridge is missing If missing install the toner cartridge For information on installing the cartridge see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide fthe toner cartridge is installed then remove the unresponsive toner cartridge and then reinstall it Note If the message appears after reinstalling the supply then the cartridge is defective Replace the toner cartridge Troubleshooting 266 Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit 31 xy Try one or more of the following Check if the imaging unit is missing If missing install the imaging unit For information on installing the imaging unit see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide fthe imaging unit is installed then remove the unresponsive imaging unit and then reinstall it Note If the message appears after reinstalling the supply then the imaging unit is defective Replace the imaging unit Replace unsupported cartridge 32 xy Remove the toner cartridge and then install a supported one to clear the messag
194. g Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Finding printer security information In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons For more information go to the Lexmark security Web page or see the Embedded Web Server Security Administrator s Guide at http support lexmark com Maintaining the printer 223 Maintaining the printer Warning Potential Damage Failure to maintain optimum printer performance or to replace parts and supplies may cause damage to your printer Cleaning printer parts Cleaning the printer Note You may need to perform this task after every few months Warning Potential Damage Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer warranty 1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding 2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder Remove any dust lint and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum 4 Dampen a clean lint free cloth with water and use it to wipe the outside of the printer Warning
195. g information about the network settings of the printer Note This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers Print a report containing information about the network settings of the printer Note This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers and when there is more than one network option installed Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts Fax Job Log Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes Notes This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu This menu is supported only in some printer models Fax Call Log Copy Shortcuts Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted received and blocked calls Notes This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu This menu is supported only in some printer models Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts E mail Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts Print a report containing information about e mail shortcuts Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer Print Fonts Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in LLL
196. g on your operating system Learning about the printer 10 What are you looking for Find it here The latest supplemental information updates and customer Lexmark support Web site support http support lexmark com Documentation Note Select your country or region and then select Driver downloads your product to view the appropriate support site Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country or region can be found on the support Web site or on the printed warranty that came with your Voice support printer Live chat support E mail support Record the following information located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer and have it ready when you contact customer support so that they may serve you faster Machine Type number Serial number Date purchased Store where purchased Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region n the U S See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer or go to http support lexmark com n other countries and regions See the printed warranty that came with this printer Selecting a location for the printer A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely When selecting a location for the printer leave enough room to open trays covers and doors If you plan to
197. g only if the width is at least 210 mm 8 27 in and the length is at least 279 4 mm 11 in The smallest supported Universal paper size is supported only in the multipurpose feeder Supported paper types and weights Note Labels transparencies envelopes and card stock always print at a reduced speed Paper type Standard 250 or Multipurpose Duplex mode ADF 550 sheet tray 550 sheet tray feeder Plain paper V V X Scanner glass v X lt Card stock Transparencies Recycled lt S MIX lt x Paper labels Bond Envelope V Rough envelope Letterhead Preprinted Light paper V V V Heavy paper V V V Rough Cotton J J Custom Type x x He x x x x xILISISISIS vet x lt lt iis jli i a Se Se SO SO SO SS SO SU SS lt 1 Transparencies are supported only in the 250 sheet tray 2 Use envelopes that lie flat when individually placed on a table facedown Paper and specialty media guide Paper sizes types and weights supported by the optional finisher Supported paper sizes Paper size Dimensions Staple finisher A4 210 x 297 mm 8 3 x 11 7 in X A5 148 x 210 mm 5 8 x 8 3 in X A6 105 x 148 mm 4 1 x 5 8 in X JIS B5 182 x 257 mm 7 2 x 10 1 in X Letter 216 x 279 mm 8 5 x 11 in V Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in V Executive 184 x 267 mm 7 3 x 10 5 in X Oficio M xico 2
198. g paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability Consider these characteristics when evaluating new paper stock Weight The standard printer trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 90 g m 24 Ib bond grain long paper The optional trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 120 g m 32 Ib bond grain long paper The multipurpose feeder can automatically feed paper weights up to 163 g m 43 Ib bond grain long paper Paper lighter than 60 g m 16 Ib might not be stiff enough to feed properly causing jams For best performance use 75 g m 20 Ib bond grain long paper For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm 7 2 x 10 1 inches it is recommended to use 90 g m 24 Ib or heavier paper Note Two sided printing is supported only for 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib bond paper Curl Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer where it is exposed to high temperatures Storing paper unwrapped in hot humid cold or dry conditions even in the trays can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems Smoothness Paper smoothness directly affects print quality If paper is too rough toner cannot fuse to it properly If paper is too smooth it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points smoothness between 150 250 Sheffiel
199. g the fax number 115 setting the outgoing fax name 115 setting the paper size 53 setting the paper type 53 setting the Universal paper size 53 setting up e mail alerts 235 setting up fax country or region specific 111 digital telephone service 110 DSL connection 108 standard telephone line connection 104 VoIP connection 109 setting up fax and e mail functions 305 setting up serial printing 52 Settings menu 200 shipping the printer 234 shortcuts creating e mail 96 fax destination 118 119 FTP address 125 FTP destination 125 showing icons on the home screen 21 sides duplex copy options 93 Sleep Mode adjusting 215 SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator 267 SMTP Setup menu 155 Some held jobs were not restored 267 standard bin using 63 Standard Network menu 144 Standard network software error 54 267 standard tray loading 53 Standard USB menu 149 Standard USB port disabled 56 268 staple cartridge replacing 231 staple cartridges ordering 226 statement of volatility 219 status of parts checking 225 status of supplies checking 225 storing paper 72 supplies 227 storing print jobs 80 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 296 streaked vertical lines appear on prints 297 streaks appear 299 subject and message information adding to e mail 98 Substitute Size menu 137 supplies checking status 225 checking from printer control panel 225 checking using the Embedded Web Server 225 c
200. gs gt General Settings gt Quiet Mode gt select a setting Saving money and the environment 215 Use To On Reduce printer noise Notes Print jobs are processed at a reduced speed Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print There will be a short delay before the first page is printed Off Use factory default settings Note This setting supports the performance specifications of the printer 3 Click Submit Adjusting Sleep mode 1 From the home screen navigate to zzz gt Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts gt Sleep Mode 2 Inthe Sleep Mode field select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode 3 Apply the changes Using Hibernate mode Hibernate is an ultra low power operating mode Notes Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job A hard reset or a long press of the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode fthe printer is in Hibernate mode then the Embedded Web Server is disabled 1 From the home screen navigate to i gt Settings gt General Settings 2 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button menu select Hibernate and then touch Submit Setting Hibernate Timeout Hibernate Timeout lets you set the am
201. han is available Notes Offisthe factory default setting This sets the printer to retain the downloads only until memory is needed Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs Onretains the downloads during language changes and printer resets If the printer runs out of memory then Memory Full 38 appears and downloads are not deleted Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All is selected Note Alphabetical is the factory default setting Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel Understanding the printer menus 202 Finishing menu Use To Sides Duplex Specify whether two sided printing is set as the default for all print jobs 1 sided Notes 2 sided 1sided is the factory default setting Youcan set two sided printing from the printer software Duplex Binding Define the way two sided pages are bound and printed Long Edge Notes Short Edge Long Edge is the factory default setting This setting assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Copies Specify the default number of copies for each print job 1 999 Note 1 is the factory default setting Blank Pages Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Do Not Print Note Do
202. he Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper loaded in the tray Step 3 a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do print irregularities still appear Step 4 Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes Are you printing on textured or rough paper Go to step 3 Go to step 4 From the printer control panel set the paper texture in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Specify the paper size and type from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray The problem is solved Go to step 5 Troubleshooting 291 Action Yes No Step 5 Go to step 6 The problem is solved a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do print irregularities still appear Step 6 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job support at http support lexmar ni k com or your service Do print irregularities still appear y representative M Repeating defects appear on prints N Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 1 Check if the Measure the distance between the
203. he historical printing consumption Considerthe variable level of accuracy before purchasing or replacing supplies based on the estimate Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer the estimated cartridge yield is based on approximately 596 coverage per page Storing supplies Choose a cool clean storage area for the printer supplies Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them Do not expose supplies to Direct sunlight Temperatures above 35 C 95 F High humidity above 8096 Salty air Corrosive gases Heavy dust Replacing supplies Replacing the toner cartridge 1 Press the button on the right side of the printer and then open the front door Maintaining the printer 228 2 Pull the toner cartridge out using the handle 3 Unpack the toner cartridge and then remove all packing materials 4 Shake the new cartridge to redistribute the toner 5 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 6 Close the front door Maintaining the printer 229 Replacing the imaging unit 1 Press the button on the right side of the printer and then open the front door 2 Pull the toner cartridge ou
204. he shortcut when e mailing another document using the same settings E mailing 97 E mailing a document You can use the printer to e mail scanned documents to one or more recipients in a number of ways You can type the e mail address use a shortcut number or use the address book You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut application from the home screen For more information see Activating the home screen applications on page 22 Sending an e mail using the printer control panel 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides Note To avoid a cropped image make sure that the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same 3 From the home screen navigate to E mail Recipient s 4 Type the e mail address or press using the keypad and then enter the shortcut number Notes Toenter additional recipients touch Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add You can also enter an e mail address using the address book 5 Touch Done Send It Sending an e mail using a shortcu
205. he tray Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type b Insert the tray properly If jam recovery is enabled then the print jobs will reprint automatically Do paper jams still occur frequently Step 2 a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do paper jams still occur frequently Step 3 a Reviewthetips on avoiding jams For more information see jams on page 238 b Follow the recommendations and then resend the print job a Do paper jams still occur frequently Yes The problem is solved Avoiding Yes Go to step 2 Go to step 3 Contact customer support 275 No Contact customer support The problem is solved The problem is solved The problem is solved 276 Troubleshooting Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared Action Yes No Check the entire paper path for jammed paper Contact customer The problem is solved support a Remove any jammed paper b From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Does the paper jam message remain Jammed jammed pagesarenotreprinted lt are not reprinted The c
206. hen printing is the factory default setting Set the amount of time the printer waits before it enters Hibernate mode Note 3 days is the factory default setting Setthe printerto Hibernate mode even ifthere is an active Ethernet connection Notes Do Not Hibernate is the factory default setting The fax function is available only in select printer models Set the amount of time in seconds before returning the control panel to a Ready state Note 30 seconds is the factory default setting Continue a specified job without returning to the home screen when the screen timeout timer expires Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 169 Use To Timeouts Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an Print Timeout end of job message before canceling the rest of the job Disabled Notes 1 255 90 seconds is the factory default setting When the timer expires any partially printed page still in the printer is printed and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation This has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs Timeouts Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional Wait Timeout data before canceling a print job Disabled Notes 15 65535 40 seconds is the factory default setting Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using PostScrip
207. i aea EE uae zu du o ge d nu ra o ego cu 28 Installing a memory Card ete eco tt de aceite ua dee vpn EUR ER FP Os eo OUR rd Pea o deve eee 29 stalling an optional Cardi e erem Cosi re di eiecti EEE ap Rise eina 31 Installing an Internal Solutions Port eene ee iia dieiis 32 Installing a printer hard disk etre eee repe rU eod Ede E esto Re ee ee 39 Removing a printer hard disk 3 etre Getae Pei cie Geri Pues risp acria i eben faite eta RE Eran 42 Contents 3 Installing hardware optiOns on eh neri educated e oerte De Pe eee e d ye de ee Ha Fo enean ded 43 Order otinstallatiOn 3 5 eto RERO a rete NEN NEN RUN e n Re ere eiae gs 43 Installing optional trays ete tte dett eet at riae Hee ol deter 43 Setting up the printer software essssssssesseeeeeeeeene nennen nennen nennen asses nene tei nnne nasse esee eene ease Eais 46 Installing the printer rere eet Noni a el ed ppc te ise ceec e b eg qu TR EE rerien 46 Adding available options in the print driver c ccccccsssecccesesessececcessssaeeccsssseseesesessseeeeeeseseasesesss nnns nennen 46 Attaching cables e eee iaa eere ext Fe ee NER E CE eU TEE RENE EE AE AE TEE REM Ego ee NR SEE PRODR REI SERES 46 Networklhg ii reed ee eae ehe e redeo P ee REOR en sence a a TET ee ceu 48 Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network cccccsscccccsssssssecescesseeeceseesssececesesesaeecesesesseesueeeeees 48 Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless net
208. ics Text Photo Photo 184 To Specify the content of the original document Note Text Photo is the factory default setting Content Source Black White Laser Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Fax Resolution Standard Fine 200 dpi Super Fine 300 dpi Ultra Fine 600 dpi Specify how the content was originally produced Note Black White Laser is the factory default setting Specify quality in dots per inch dpi Note Standard is the factory default setting Darkness 1 9 Orientation Portrait Landscape Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Custom Scan Size x Book Original Business Card 3x5in 4x 6in Lighten or darken the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Specify the orientation of the scanned image Note Portrait is the factory default setting Specify the size of the original document Note Mixed Sizes is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 185 Use Multi Page TIFF On Off Provide a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to fax job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the scan job Note On is the factory default s
209. igate to m gt Network Ports Network x Network x Setup Wireless Wireless Connection Setup Wi Fi Protected Setup Start Push Button Method 2 Follow the instructions on the printer display Using the Personal Identification Number PIN method 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless gt Wireless Connection Setup gt Wi Fi Protected Setup gt Start PIN Method 2 Copy the eight digit WPS PIN 3 Open a Web browser and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field Notes The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 4 Access the WPS settings For more information see the documentation that came with your access point 5 Enter the eight digit PIN and then save the setting Additional printer setup 51 Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server Before you begin make sure that Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network e A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes
210. ige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Deutsch Hiermit erkl rt Lexmark International Inc dass sich das Ger t dieses Ger t in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet EMnvik ME THN IAPOYZA H LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC AHAONEI OTI AYTO TO NPOION ZYMMOPQQNETAI NPOZ TIZ OYZIOAEIZ ATIAITHXEIX KAI TIZ AOINE2 ZXETIKE2 AIATAZEIZ TH OAHMIAZ 1999 5 EK English Hereby Lexmark International Inc declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Espa ol Por medio de la presente Lexmark International Inc declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Eesti K esolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International Inc et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999 5 EU p hin uetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele s tetele Suomi Lexmark International Inc vakuuttaa t ten ett t m tuote on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sit koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen Fran ais Par la pr sente Lexmark International Inc d clare que l appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Magyar Alul rott Lexmark International In
211. in 0 01 inch increments 216 mmis the international factory default setting You can increase the width in 1 mm increments Portrait Height Set the portrait height 3 14 17 inches Notes 76 360 mm fthe height exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum height allowed 14 inches is the U S factory default setting You can increase the height in 0 01 inch increments e 356 mm is the international factory default setting You can increase the height in 1 mm increments Feed Direction Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction Short Edge Notes Long Edge Short Edge is the factory default setting Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than the maximum width supported in the tray Understanding the printer menus Reports menu Use Menu Settings Page 143 To Print a report on the current printer menu settings The report also contains information about the status of the supplies and a list of hardware options that are successfully installed Device Statistics Stapler Test Network Setup Page Network x Setup Page Shortcut List Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and the number of printed pages Print a report that confirms whether the staple finisher is functioning properly Note This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed Print a report containin
212. ing display printer display is blank 271 troubleshooting fax caller ID is not shown 306 can receive but not send faxes 309 can send but not receive faxes 308 cannot send or receive a fax 306 received fax has poor print quality 310 troubleshooting paper feed message remains after jam is cleared 276 troubleshooting print error reading flash drive 277 held jobs do not print 279 incorrect characters print 281 incorrect margins on prints 288 jammed pages are not reprinted 276 job prints from wrong tray 281 job prints on wrong paper 281 jobs do not print 277 Large jobs do not collate 282 multiple language PDF files do not print 276 paper curl 289 paper frequently jams 275 print job takes longer than expected 280 tray linking does not work 282 unexpected page breaks occur 283 troubleshooting print quality blank pages 284 characters have jagged edges 283 clipped pages or images 285 gray background on prints 287 horizontal voids appear on prints 298 print irregularities 290 print is too dark 292 print is too light 293 printer is printing solid black pages 295 repeating print defects appear on prints 291 shadow images appear on prints 286 skewed print 294 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 296 streaked vertical lines 297 toner fog or background shading 300 toner rubs off 301 toner specks appear on prints 300 transparency print quality is poor 296 uneven print density 301 white streaks on a page 299 troubleshoo
213. ing edge Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper loaded b Resend the print job Is the page or image clipped Step 2 Go to step 3 Do one or more of the From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper following menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Specify the paper size from the tray Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the paper size from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Is the page or image clipped Troubleshooting 286 Action Yes No Step 4 Contact customer The problem is solved a Reinstall the imaging unit support 1 Remove the toner cartridge 2 Remove the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the page or image clipped Ms Prints on color transparencies appear dark when projected Note This problem occurs when proj
214. ing system specify support the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do copies print properly Solving fax problems Fax and e mail functions are not set up on page 305 Caller ID is not shown on page 306 Cannot send or receive a fax on page 306 Can send but not receive faxes on page 308 Can receive but not send faxes on page 309 Received fax has poor print quality on page 310 Fax and e mail functions are not set up Notes Before you troubleshoot check if the fax cables are connected The indicator light is blinking red until you set up fax and e mail Action Yes No a From the home screen navigate to The problem is solved Contact customer support zzz gt Settings gt General Settings gt Run initial setup gt Yes gt Submit b Turn off the printer and then turn it back on The Select your language screen appears on the printer display Select a language and then touch v i c d Select a country or region and then touch Next e Select a time zone and then touch Next f Select Fax and E mail and then touch Next Are fax and e mail functions set up Troubleshooting Caller ID is not shown Action Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service Notes f your region supports multiple caller ID p
215. ings to match the paper loaded in the tray Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings Contact customer support Adjust the width and length guides Specify the paper type and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Step 3 a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Is the paper still curled Go to step 4 The problem is solved Step 4 a Remove the paper from the tray and then turn it over b Resend the print job Is the paper still curled Go to step 5 The problem is solved Troubleshooting Action Step 5 a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Is the paper still curled Yes Contact customer support 290 No The problem is solved Print irregularities Leading edge Trailing edge Action Step 1 a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded in the tray b Resend the print job Do print irregularities still appear Yes Go to step 2 No The problem is solved Step 2 From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in t
216. install any options then leave enough room for them also It is important to Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee 156 standard Provide a flat sturdy and stable surface Keep the printer Clean dry and free of dust Away from stray staples and paper clips Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners heaters or ventilators Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations 15 6 t0 327 C 60 to 90 Storage temperature 1 to 35 C 34 to 95 F Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation Learning about the printer 11 1 Right side 304 8 mm 12 in 2 Front 508 mm 20 in 3 Leftside 203 2 mm 8 in 4 Rear 203 2 mm 8 in 5 Top 800 mm 31 49 in Printer configurations CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes then you may need add
217. int queue select the print job you want to cancel and then delete it Printing For Macintosh users 1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu navigate to your printer 2 From the print queue select the print job you want to cancel and then delete it 83 Copying 84 Copying Automatic document feeder ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Making copies Making a quick copy 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides Note To avoid a cropped image make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy paper are the same 3 From the printer control panel press lt gt Copying using the ADF 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on
218. inted and then touch Print Notes Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing f you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen then touch Held Jobs on the home screen to print files from the flash drive Printing from a mobile device To download a compatible mobile printing application visit www lexmark com mobile Note Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer Supported flash drives and file types Notes High speed USB flash drives must support the full speed standard Low speed USB devices are not supported USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table FAT system Devices formatted with New Technology File System NTFS or any other file system are not supported Printing 80 Recommended flash drives File type Lexar JumpDrive FireFly 512MB and 1GB Documents SanDisk Cruzer Micro 512MB and 1GB pdf Sony Micro Vault Classic 512MB and 1GB xps Images dcx gif jpeg or jpg bmp pcx tiff or tif png e fls Printing confidential and other held jobs Storing print jobs in the printer 1 From the printer control panel navigate to ERE Security Confidential Print select the print job type Use To Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered Note When the limit
219. inter control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt Print Settings gt Quality Menu gt Toner Darkness 2 Adjust the setting and then touch Submit Printing from a flash drive or mobile device Printing from a flash drive Notes Before printing an encrypted PDF file you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer control panel You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions 1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port Notes Aflash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted f you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention such as when a jam has occurred then the printer ignores the flash drive Printing 79 f you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs then Busy appears on the printer display After these print jobs are processed you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the USB cable any wireless network adapter any connector the memory device or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing reading or writing from the memory device Loss of data can occur 2 From the printer control panel touch the document you want to print 3 Touch the arrows to get a preview of the document 4 Use t or to specify the number of copies to be pr
220. is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do shadow images still appear on prints Step 4 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job support Do shadow images still appear on prints Gray background on prints Leading edge Trailing edge Action Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 Check if Allow Background Removal is set to Off a From the General Settings menu set Allow Background Removal to On b Resend the print job Did the background disappear from the prints Troubleshooting 288 Action Yes No Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 Adjust the toner darkness to a lighter setting a From the Quality Menu select a lower value to reduce toner density e 4is the factory default setting If Print Mode is set to Black Only then a setting of 5 increases toner density and darkness for all print jobs b Resend the print job Did the background disappear from the prints Step 3 The problem is solved Go to step 4 Reinstall the toner cartridge a Remove the cartridge b Install the cartridge c Resend the print job Did the background disappear from the prints The problem is solved Contact customer Step 4 support Check if off white backgro
221. itional furniture For more information see www lexmark com mwultifunctionprinters Learning about the printer Basic model Display 12 Automatic document feeder ADF ADF tray ADF bin Standard bin N OoOU1 U N HP Multipurpose feeder Standard 550 sheet tray Note A lockable 550 sheet tray is also available For more information contact the place where you purchased the printer Learning about the printer 13 Configured model 1 Optional 250 sheet tray 2 Optional 550 sheet tray 3 Optional stapler Using the Embedded Web Server Note This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers If the printer is installed on a network then you can use the Embedded Web Server to do the following View the virtual display of the printer control panel Check the status of the printer supplies Configure supply notifications Configure printer settings Configure network settings View reports To access the Embedded Web Server for your printer 1 2 Obtain the printer IP address From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Notes An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly
222. izes gt ZS 4 Navigate to Copy to gt Letter gt v Copy It The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on the paper size selected Copying on both sides of the paper duplexing 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Sides Duplex gt select the preferred duplexing method Note For the preferred duplexing method the first number represents sides of the original documents while the second number represents sides of the copy For example select 2 sided to 2 sided if you have two sided original documents and you want two sided copies 4 Touch ZS gt Copy It Reducing or enlarging copies Copies can be scaled from 25 to 400 of the original document size 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these ite
223. k has found no reason to discourage the use of today s recycled office papers but generally the following property guidelines apply to recycled paper Low moisture content 4 596 Suitable smoothness 100 200 Sheffield units or 140 350 Bendtsen units European Note Some much smoother papers such as premium 24 Ib laser papers 50 90 Sheffield units and much rougher papers such as premium cotton papers 200 300 Sheffield units have been engineered to work very well in laser printers despite surface texture Before using these types of paper consult your paper supplier Suitable sheet to sheet coefficient of friction 0 4 0 6 e Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed Recycled paper paper of lower weight 60 g m 16 Ib bond and or lower caliper 3 8 mils 0 1 mm and paper that is cut grain short for portrait or short edge fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for reliable paper feeding Before using these types of paper for laser electrophotographic printing consult your paper supplier Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause paper feeding problems in any laser printer for example if the paper curls excessively under normal printing conditions Paper and specialty media guide 72 Storing paper Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality For best results store
224. l phonique En bout de ligne le nombre d appareils qui peuvent tre connect s n est pas directement limit mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas d passer cinq Le num ro REN du modem est indiqu sur l tiquette produit situ e l arri re de l quipement Les compagnies de t l phone constatent que les surtensions lectriques en particulier celles dues la foudre entra nent d importants d g ts sur les terminaux priv s connect s des sources d alimentation CA Il s agit l d un probl me majeur d chelle nationale En cons quence il vous est recommand de brancher un parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant laquelle l quipement est connect Utilisez un parasurtenseur r pondant des caract ristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifi par le laboratoire d assureurs UL Underwriter s Laboratories un autre laboratoire agr de type NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory ou un organisme de certification agr dans votre r gion ou pays Ceci pr vient tout endommagement de l quipement caus par les orages et autres surtensions lectriques Cet quipement utilise des prises de t l phone CA11A Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to i
225. l layer of security The choices are AES or TKIP Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network 802 1X RADIUS If you are installing the printer on an 802 1X network then you may need the following Authentication type nner authentication type 802 1X user name and password Certificates No security If your wireless network does not use any type of security then you will not have any security information Note We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network Notes f you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to then launch the wireless utility of the computer network adapter and then look for the network name If you cannot find the SSID or the security information for your network then see the documentation that came with the access point or contact your system support person To find the WPA WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network see the documentation that came with the access point see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point or consult your system support person Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard Before you begin make sure that A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter An Ether
226. l the job Note This attempts to enable the scanner Scanner jam remove all originals from the scanner 2yy xx Remove the jammed paper from the scanner Scanner jam remove jammed originals from the scanner 2yy xx Remove the jammed paper from the scanner Serial port x disabled 56 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the specified serial port Make sure Serial Buffer is not set to Disabled From the printer control panel set Serial Buffer to Auto in the Serial x menu SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Note If the message appears again then contact your system support person Some held jobs were not restored From the printer control panel touch Continue to delete the indicated job Note Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible Standard network software error 54 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to continue printing Turn off the printer and then turn it back on Update the network firmware in the printer or print server For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com or contact customer support and then report the message Troubleshooting 268 Standard USB p
227. lay Step 4 Go to step 5 Securely connect the cables S e E Troubleshooting Action Step 5 a Check the telephone wall jack 1 Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack 2 Listen for a dial tone 3 If you do not hear a dial tone then plug a different telephone cable into the wall jack 4 If you still do not hear a dial tone then plug the telephone cable into a different wall jack 5 If you hear a dial tone then connect the printer to that wall jack b Try sending or receiving a fax Can you send or receive a fax Yes The problem is solved 307 No Go to step 6 Step 6 Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector The fax modem is an analog device Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used f you are using an ISDN telephone service then connect the printer to an analog telephone port an R interface port on an ISDN terminal adapter For more information and to request an R interface port contact your ISDN provider f youare using DSL then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use For more information contact your DSL provider f you are using a PBX telephone service then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX If none exists then consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine Is the printer connected t
228. ld 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast 0 5 Best for content Mirror Image Off On Specify which colorto drop and to adjustthe dropout setting for each color threshold Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specify the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Create a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Negative Image Off On Create a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Shadow Detail 4to4 Adjust ADF Skew Auto Off On Scan edge to edge Off On Sharpness 1 5 Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Correct slight skew in the scanned image Notes Auto is the factory default setting This menu item is supported only in some printer models Specify whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of sharpness of the scanned image Note 3 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 194 Temperature Enable the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output Ato4 than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default N
229. le alerts can be set for the end of life supply condition E mail selectable alert is available for all supply conditions The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some supply conditions 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Print Settings Supply Notifications 3 From the drop down menu for each supply select one of the following notification options Notification Description Off The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs E mail Only The printer generates an e mail when the supply condition is reached The status of the supply appears on the menus page and status page Warning The printer displays the warning message and generates an e mail about the status of the supply The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached Continuable Stop The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached and the user needs to press a button to continue printing Non Continuable Stopt The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached The supply must be replaced to continue printing 1 The printer gene
230. led you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs For more information see Adding available options in the print driver on page 46 Touninstall the optional trays slide the latch on the right side of the printer toward the front of the printer until it clicks into place and then remove stacked trays one at a time from the top to the bottom Additional printer setup Setting up the printer software Installing the printer 1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package 2 Runthe installer and then follow the instructions on the computer screen 3 For Macintosh users add the printer Note Obtain the printer IP address from the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu Adding available options in the print driver For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder In Windows 8 From the Search charm type run and then navigate to Run type control printers gt OK In Windows 7 or earlier a Click e or click Start and then click Run b Typecontrol printers C Press Enter or click OK 2 Select the printer you want to update and then do either of the following For Windows 7 or later select Printer properties For earlier versions select Properties 3 Navigate to the Configuration tab and then select Update Now Ask Printer 4 Apply the changes For Macintosh users 1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu navigate to your printer and then
231. lign the screws on the printer hard disk to the slots on the controller board bracket and then slide the printer hard disk onto the brackets d Tighten the two screws 4 Close the controller board shield and then close the controller board access door Note When the printer software and any hardware options are installed you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs For more information see Adding available options in the print driver on page 46 Additional printer setup 42 Removing a printer hard disk Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 28 Note This task requires a flat head screwdriver 2 Loosen the screws that connect the printer hard disk to the controller board bracket 3 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the receptacle in the controller board leaving the cable attached tothe printer hard disk To unplug the cable squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling the cable out 4 Hold the printer hard disk by the edges and then remove it from the printer 5 Close the controller board shield and then close the
232. lity 314 Action Yes No Step 1 Clear the error Go to step 2 Check if an error message appears on the display message Is there an error message on the printer display Step 2 Go to step 3 Increase the scan Check the quality of the original document resolution settings for a higher quality output Is the quality of the original document satisfactory Step 3 Go to step 4 See Cleaning the Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean lint free cloth scanner glass on dampened with water page 224 Is the scanner glass clean Step 4 Go to step 5 Place the document or Check the placement of the document or photo photo facedown on the Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner mec in in the glass in the upper left corner upper ert corner Is the document or photo loaded correctly Step 5 Go to step 6 See Print quality Send a print job and then check for print quality problems problems on age 283 From the General Settings menu adjust the Eco Mode settings PERS From the Copy menu adjust the toner darkness When the print becomes faded replace the toner cartridge Is the print quality satisfactory Step 6 Problem solved Go to step 7 Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher quality output Did the increased resolution produce a higher quality output Step 7 Check the scan settings Fromthe Scan screen make surethe Content Type and Content Source
233. llate Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies 1 1 1 2 2 2 Note 1 2 3 1 2 3 is the factory default setting 1 2 3 1 2 3 Sides Duplex Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page 1 sided Note 1 sided is the factory default setting 2 sided Staple Specify whether prints are stapled Off Notes On Off is the factory default setting This menu appears only when a staple finisher is installed Duplex Binding Define binding for two sided pages in relation to page orientation Long Edge Notes Short Edge Long Edge is the factory default setting It assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Paper Saver Specify that multiple page images be printed on one side of a paper Off 2 Up 3 Up Off is the factory default setting Notes 4 Up The number selected is the number of page images that print per side 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Paper Saver Ordering Specify the positioning of multiple page images Horizontal Notes Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Horizontal is the factory default setting Vertical Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation Understanding the printer menus 199 Paper Saver O
234. lling an Internal Solutions Port 32 installing an optional card 31 installing options order of installation 43 installing printer 46 installing printer hard disk 39 installing the 250 sheet tray 43 installing the 550 sheet tray 43 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 37 260 Insufficient memory to collate job 37 260 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 35 260 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 37 260 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 37 260 internal options 27 Internal Solutions Port changing port settings 51 installing 32 troubleshooting 274 IP address of computer finding 20 IP address printer finding 20 IPv6 menu 147 Index J jams accessing 239 avoiding 238 understanding messages 239 jams clearing finisher bin 249 in automatic document feeder top cover 240 in duplex area 246 in front door 243 in manual feeder 247 in rear door 241 in standard bin 241 in staple access door 249 in tray x 248 Job Accounting menu 204 L labels paper tips 68 letterhead copying on 86 loading multipurpose feeder 58 tips on using 67 light indicator 15 line filter 108 linking trays 64 65 Load paper source with custom string paper orientation 261 Load paper source with custom type name paper orientation 260 Load paper source with paper size paper orientation 261 Load paper source with paper type paper size p
235. lope Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus Notes Paper is the factory default setting The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder to print from that source Custom Names menu Custom Name x Specify a custom name for a paper type This name replaces Custom Type x in the printer menus Understanding the printer menus 142 Custom Scan Sizes menu Use Le Custom Scan Size x Specify a custom scan size name size and page orientation Scan Size Name Notes Width Height 8 5 inches is the U S factory default setting for Width 216 mm is the i international factory default setting for Width Orientation 14 inches is the U S factory default setting for Height 356 mm is the 2 scans per side n international factory default setting for Height Off On Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side Universal Setup menu Use To Units of Measure Identify the units of measure Inches Notes Millimeters Inches is the U S factory default setting Millimeters is the international factory default setting Portrait Width Set the portrait width 3 14 17 inches Notes 76 360 mm e f the width exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum width allowed 8 5 inches is the U S factory default setting You can increase the width
236. lty media into the multipurpose feeder Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the paper guides Overfilling may cause paper jams Load paper transparencies and card stock with the recommended printable side faceup and the top edge entering the printer first For more information on loading transparencies see the packaging that the transparencies came in Note When loading A6 size paper make sure the multipurpose feeder extender rests lightly against the edge of the paper so that the last few sheets of paper remain in place Loading paper and specialty media Load letterhead faceup with the top edge entering the printer first For two sided duplex printing load letterhead facedown with the bottom edge entering the printer first 62 Loading paper and specialty media 63 Load envelopes with the flap on the left side facedown Warning Potential Damage Never use envelopes with stamps clasps snaps windows coated linings or self stick adhesives These envelopes may severely damage the printer 5 From the printer control panel set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper or specialty media loaded in the multipurpose feeder Using the standard bin and paper stop The standard bin holds up to 150 sheets of 20 Ib paper It collects prints facedown The standard bin includes a paper stop that keeps paper from sliding out the fr
237. m is solved Go to step 10 Go to step 11 Step 11 Scan the original document one page at a time a Dial the fax number b Scan the document one page at a time Can you send or receive a fax ko The problem is solved Contact customer support Can send but not receive faxes Action Step 1 Check the tray or feeder If empty then load paper in the tray or feeder Can you receive faxes Ma Yes The problem is solved No Go to step 2 Troubleshooting Action Step 2 Check the ring count delay settings a Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly b Click Settings Fax Settings Analog Fax Setup c In the Rings to Answer field enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers d Click Submit Can you receive faxes Step 3 Replace the toner cartridge For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply Can you receive faxes Yes The problem is solved The problem is solved 309 No Go to step 3 Contact customer support Can receive but not send faxes Action St
238. mall items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings You can use the printer to e mail scanned documents to one or more recipients There are three ways to send an e mail from the printer You can type the e mail address use a shortcut number or use the address book Setting up the printer to e mail Setting up the e mail function 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings E mail FTP Settings E mail Settings 3 Enter the appropriate information and then click Submit Configuring e mail settings 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings E mail FTP Settings E mail Settings 3 Enter the appropriate information and then click Submit E mailing 96 Creating an e mail shortcut Creating an e mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Ope
239. maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer disable or reduce the size of the USB serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes Off is the factory default setting On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Advanced Status On Off Protocol Standard Fastbytes Honor Init On Off Parallel Mode 2 On Off We MLL Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port Notes Onis the factory default setting Off disables parallel port negotiation Specify the parallel port protocol Notes Fastbytes is the factory default setting It provides compatibility with most existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the compute
240. may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location You are responsible for loss of or damage to a product in transitto the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part the item replaced becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark The replacement may be a new or repaired item The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced altered in need of a repair not included in warranty service damaged beyond repair or if the product is not free of all legal obligations restrictions liens and encumbrances As part of your warranty service and or replacement Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest version Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and or unauthorized products supplies parts materials such as toners and inks software or interfaces to stop working Authorized use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted Before you presentthis product for warranty service remove all print cartridges programs data and removable storage media unless directed otherwise by Lexmark For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact Lexma
241. mbedded Web Server 225 using genuine Lexmark 225 PCL Emul menu 208 PDF menu 207 Personal Identification Number method using 50 phone splitter 109 photos copying 85 placing separator sheets between copies 90 port settings configuring 51 PostScript menu 207 preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network 48 print driver hardware options adding 46 print irregularities 290 print job canceling from computer 82 print quality cleaning the scanner glass 224 print quality troubleshooting blank pages 284 characters have jagged edges 283 clipped pages or images 285 gray background on prints 287 horizontal voids appear on prints 298 print irregularities 290 print is too dark 292 print is too light 293 printer is printing solid black pages 295 repeating print defects appear on prints 291 shadow images appear on prints 286 skewed print 294 Index streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 296 streaked vertical lines 297 toner fog or background shading 300 toner rubs off 301 toner specks appear on prints 300 transparency print quality is poor 296 uneven print density 301 white streaks 299 print troubleshooting error reading flash drive 277 held jobs do not print 279 incorrect characters print 281 incorrect margins on prints 288 jammed pages are not reprinted 276 job prints from wrong tray 281 job prints on wrong paper 281 jobs do not print 277 Large jobs do not collate 282 multiple language PDF files do not print
242. minates the printer and could void the warranty If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible then remove a 2 mm 0 06 inches strip on the leading and driver edge and use a non oozing adhesive Portrait orientation is recommended especially when printing bar codes Paper and specialty media guide 69 Tips on using card stock Card stock is heavy single ply specialty media Many of its variable characteristics such as moisture content thickness and texture can significantly impact print quality Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities From the Paper menu set the Paper Type to Card Stock Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting Beaware that preprinting perforation and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper handling problems Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 220 C 446 F without releasing hazardous emissions Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer Preprinting introduces semi liquid and volatile components into the printer Use grain short card stock when possible Paper guidelines Selecting the correct paper or specialty media reduces printing problems For the best print quality try a sample of the paper or specialty media before buying large quantities Paper characteristics The followin
243. move the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Firmly shake the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Reinstall the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Do horizontal voids appear on prints Yes Go to step 4 299 No The problem is solved Step 4 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Do horizontal voids appear on prints M Contact customer support The problem is solved Vertical voids appear on prints Leading edge P e Trailing edge Action Step 1 a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints Yes Go to step 2 No The problem is solved Step 2 a From the printer control panel set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints Step 3 Check if you are using a recommended type of paper a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints Go to step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved The problem is solved Troubleshooting 300 Action Yes No Step 4 Go to step 5 Th
244. ms on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen touch Copy Copying 89 4 From the Scale area touch or F to decrease or increase the value by 1 Touching Copy to or Copy from after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting This automatically adjusts the scan image of the original document to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying 5 Touch Copy It Adjusting copy quality 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy Content 4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying Text The content of the original document is mostly text or line art Text Photo The original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo The original document is mostly a photo or an image Graphics The original document
245. n 80 Contents 4 Printingintormation paB6es enia rie eee ee eee ti eren ese E E E NT T es Cena E uas Ee ap dedu Votes deed 82 Canceling a print o eL PE 82 COD VMN Es decisis yet Making opies ere eerta tha eee eee TERR ERE RON RR TR NE ERUR ERES EEA E E EAE REE E aE ins ERR n ee Ye e eeu 84 COpyiNe PROTOS RT n cease geaess 85 Copying on specialty media e E ed ett gei cer eei E e ee es ek Ra etie nd la abe era Ero E End 85 Customizing copy Settings oio neos a eec nno scans tees ena siis ee ee tao tots eae na Fe ERE UeQ nado ak age eels 86 Placing information on copies enne enn nennen nenas rsen a sns n sensns nasse nennt 92 Ganceling a copy JOD io ete meteor oe ee idee etie eed OE ev ee ees a epe esent 92 Understanding the copy options esses eene enn nennen nnne nenne nein nennen sene aieea enn 93 E mialliHlg dee xvi ir et ruinas veni ease ctu ies abus soeroep ope SENE na erba se peis osae Setting up the printer to emailaren areir aeei nennen nemen nn aa e aee Anea seien nn nnns 95 Creating an e miailshortCUt tree egeo DEI Eas D E ERRR EE ON BERE eurn cd vaee ae AE ER MARG eee 96 Emailing a docutrnent ec rr nre o er eee e ie eee quede aveva cote Tee see Eee eer ede Eve steeds 97 Customizing e mall Settiligs 5 72 eite petere eon haere ERI AREE ene e Ha e e Tee EPA aa rea udo eee ea Et 98 Canceling an esmialil 1 5 tr ee eee rut Eee NE oret
246. n FTP using the address book 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to FTP gt FTP gt type the name of the recipient Search Scanning 127 4 Touch the name of the recipient Note To search for additional recipients touch New Search and then type the name of the next recipient 5 Touch ZS gt Send It Scanning to a computer or flash drive Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single page documents small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive images using Scan to Computer You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer Scanning to a computer using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser
247. n a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings 3 From the Other Settings column click Manage Shortcuts E mail Shortcut Setup 4 Typeaunique nameforthe e mail recipient and then type the e mail address If you are entering multiple addresses then separate each address with a comma 5 Click Add Creating an e mail shortcut using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient gt type an e mail address To create a group of recipients touch Next address and then type the next recipient s e mail address 2 Touch Subject then type the e mail subject and then touch Done 3 Touch Message then type your message and then touch Done 4 Adjust the e mail settings Note If you change the settings after the e mail shortcut has been created then the settings are not saved 5 Touch a 6 Type a unique name for the shortcut and then touch Done 7 Verify that the shortcut name is correct and then touch OK If the shortcut name is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information Notes The shortcut name appears in the E mail Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen You can use t
248. n click Advanced TCP IP 3 Look for the IP address Finding the IP address of the printer Note Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server You can find the printer IP address From the top left corner of the printer home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Accessing the Embedded Web Server The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer 1 Obtain the printer IP address From the printer control panel home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Setting up and using the home screen applications 21 3 Press Enter Note If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly Customizing the home screen 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The
249. n the side rails of the unit with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer and then insert the imaging unit into the printer 8 Insertthe toner cartridge by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer and then insert the cartridge into the printer Clearing jams 246 9 Close the front door 10 From the printer control panel select Continue to clear the message and continue printing x page jam remove tray 1 to clear duplex 23y xx 1 Pull out the tray completely 2 Locate the lever and then pull it down to release the jam 3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 247 4 Insert the tray 5 From the printer control panel touch Done to clear the message and continue printing x page jam clear manual feeder 25y xx 1 From the multipurpose feeder firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 2 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface Clearing jams 248 3 Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder Note Make sure the paper guide lightly rests against the edge of the paper 4 From the printer control panel touch Done to clear the message and continue printing
250. n to Network on page 24 Scanning to an FTP address Creating shortcuts Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to an FTP server you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number There are two methods for creating shortcut numbers using the Embedded Web Server and using the printer control panel Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Navigate to Settings Other Settings area Manage Shortcuts FTP Shortcut Setup 3 Enter the appropriate information Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password then contact your system support person 4 Enter a shortcut number Note If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 5 Click Add Creating an FTP shortcut using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to 9 FTP gt FTP gt type the FTP address gt typea name for the shortcut gt Done 2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK Scanning 126 N
251. nderstanding the printer menus Settings menu General Settings menu Use Display Language English Francais Deutsch Italiano Espanol Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Portugues Suomi Russian Polski Greek Magyar Turkce Cesky Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean Japanese Show Supply Estimates Show estimates Do not show estimates 163 eC Set the language of the text appearing on the display Note Not all languages are available for all models You may need to install a special hardware for some languages View the estimates of the supplies on the control panel Embedded Web Server menu settings and device statistics reports Note Show estimates is the factory default setting Eco Mode Off Energy Energy Paper Paper ADF Loaded Beep Enabled Disabled Quiet Mode Off On Minimize the use of energy paper or specialty media Notes Off is the factory default setting This resets the printer to its factory default settings When setting Eco Mode to Energy or Paper performance may be affected but print quality is not Specify whether the ADF sounds a beep when paper is loaded Note Enabled is the factory default setting Minimize the printer noise Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Run Initial setup Yes No Keyboard Keyboard Type English Francais Francais Canadien Deutsch Italiano Espanol Greek Dansk No
252. nect all cables from the printer before proceeding SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Learning about the printer 9 Learning about the printer Finding information about the printer What are you looking for Find it here Initial setup instructions Setup documentation The setup documentation came with the printer and is also available at Connecting the printer http support lexmark com Installing the printer software Additional setup and instructions for using the printer User s Guide and Quick Reference Guide The guides are Selecting and storing paper and specialty media available on the Documentation CD Loading paper Note These guides are also available in other Configuring printer settings OR AREA Viewing and printing documents and photos Setting up and using the printer software Configuring the printer on a network Caring for and maintaining the printer Troubleshooting and solving problems Information on setting up and configuring the accessibility Lexmark Accessibility Guide This guide is available at features of your printer http support lexmark com Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help Opena printer software program or application and then click Help Click 2 to view context sensitive information Notes Help is automatically installed with the printer software The printer software is located in the printer program folder or on the desktop dependin
253. net cable is disconnected from the printer Active NIC is set to Auto To set this to Auto navigate to gt Network Ports gt Active NIC gt Auto gt Submit Note Make sure to turn off the printer then wait for at least five seconds and then turn the printer back on 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless gt Wireless Connection Setup 2 Select a wireless connection setup Additional printer setup 50 Search for networks Show available wireless connections Note This menu item shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs Enter a network name Manually type the SSID Note Make sure to type the correct SSID Wi Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi Fi Protected Setup 3 Follow the instructions on the printer display Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi Fi Protected Setup Before you begin make sure that The access point wireless router is Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS certified or WPS compatible For more information see the documentation that came with your access point e A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter Using the Push Button Configuration method 1 From the printer control panel nav
254. nformation about scanning documents and configuring the settings Print Defects Guide Provides a template for determining the cause of repeating print quality defects and lists settings that can be used to adjust print quality Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information Supplies Guide Provides information about ordering supplies M Saving money and the environment 213 Saving money and the environment Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact on the environment We design with the environment in mind engineer our packaging to reduce materials and provide collection and recycling programs For more information see The Notices chapter The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle By selecting certain printer settings or tasks you may be able to reduce your printer s impact even further This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit Saving paper and toner Studies show that as much as 8096 of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet
255. ng Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then touch Finished changing paper Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins Cancel the print job Change paper source to paper size load orientation Try one or more of the following Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then touch Finished changing paper Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins Cancel the print job Troubleshooting 256 Change paper source to paper type paper size load orientation Try one or more of the following Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then touch Finished changing paper Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins Cancel the print job Check tray x connection Try one or more of the following Turn off the printer and then turn it back on If the error occurs a second time then 1 uU FB WN 6 Turn off the printer Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Remove the indicated tray Reattach the tray Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet Tu
256. ng load orientation 255 Change paper source to custom type name load orientation 255 Change paper source to paper size load orientation 255 Change paper source to paper type paper size load orientation 256 Check tray x connection 256 Close finisher rear door 256 Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job 2yy xx 257 Close front door 256 341 Close rear door 256 Complex page some data may not have printed 39 257 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 57 257 Defective flash detected 51 257 Disk full 62 257 Disk must be formatted for use in this device 258 Disk near full Securely clearing disk space 258 Error reading USB drive Remove USB 258 Error reading USB hub Remove hub 258 Fax memory full 258 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 258 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 258 Fax Station Name not set up Contact system administrator 258 Fax Station Number not set up Contact system administrator 259 Imaging unit low 84 xy 259 Imaging unit nearly low 84 xy 259 Imaging unit very low x estimated pages remain 84 xy 259 Incompatible tray x 59 259 Incorrect paper size open paper source 34 259 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 37 260 Insufficient memory to collate job 37 260 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 35 260 Ins
257. ng Eco Mode 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Eco Mode gt select a setting Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco Mode Off supports the performance specifications of the printer Energy Reduce energy use especially when the printer is idle Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity Energy Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes Plain Paper Enable the automatic two sided duplex feature Turn off print log features e 3 Click Submit Reducing printer noise Enable Quiet Mode to reduce printer noise 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settin
258. ng data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onisthe factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional On communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Off Notes Auto ee Auto is the factory default setting Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding the printer menus Use Parallel Buffer Disabled Auto 3K to maximum size allowed Job Buffering Off On Auto 152 To Set the size of the parallel input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any print jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments The
259. ns The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling Notices 326 Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use This isto avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks Avis r serv aux utilisateurs du r seau t l phonique du Canada Ce produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industrie Canada Le num ro REN ringer equivalence number num ro d quivalence de sonnerie fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant tre connect s l interface t
260. nsupported option card from the printer controller board and then replace it with a supported card 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on USB port x disabled 56 From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Notes The printer discards any data received through the USB port Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled Weblink server not set up Contact system administrator From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Note If the message appears again then contact your system support person Solving printer problems Basic printer problems on page 269 Option problems on page 272 Paper feed problems on page 275 Basic printer problems The printer is not responding Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Turn on the printer Make sure the printer is turned on Is the printer turned on Step 2 Press the Sleep button Go to step 3 Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode to wake the printer from Sleep mode or Hibernate mode Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode Troubleshooting Action Step 3 Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Yes Go to step 4 270 N
261. nt parts A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not cut twist bind crush or place heavy objects on the power cord Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls If any of these things happen a risk of fire or electrical shock results Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of such problems Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it Refer service or repairs other than those described in the user documentation to a service representative CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes then you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and discon
262. ntial Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 2 Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Step 5 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job support Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints V J Streaked vertical lines appear on prints P Leading edge E i ChE T Trailing edge Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Step 2 Go to step 3 Do one or more of the From the printer control panel set the paper texture type and weight in following the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Specify the paper texture type and Do the paper texture type and weight match the paper in the tray weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper texture type and weight specified in the tray settings Troubleshooting Action Step 3 a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidit
263. nu Use To Login Restrictions Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control Login failures panel before all users are locked out Failure time frame Notes Lockout time n Login failures specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are locked out Settings range from 1 to 10 attempts 3 attempts is the factory default setting Panel Login Timeout Remote Login Timeout Failure time frame specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting Lockout time specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting 1 indicates that the printer does not impose a lockout time Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the home screen before automatically logging off the user Settings range from 1 to 900 seconds 30 seconds is the factory default setting Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains idle before automatically logging off the user Settings range from 1 to 120 minutes 10 minutes is the factory default setting Security Reset Jumper Adjust the security settings No Effect Access controls No Security Notes Reset factory security defaults No Effect m
264. nus Use Log Action at End of Frequency None E mail Current Log E mail amp Delete Current Log Post Current Log Post amp Delete Current Log 205 To Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires Note None is the factory default setting Log Near Full Level Off 1 99 Log Action at Near Full None E mail Current Log E mail amp Delete Current Log E mail amp Delete Oldest Log Post Current Log Post amp Delete Current Log Post amp Delete Oldest Log Delete Current Log Delete Oldest Log Delete All Logs Delete All But Current Log Action at Full None E mail amp Delete Current Log E mail amp Delete Oldest Log Post amp Delete Current Log Post amp Delete Oldest Log Delete Current Log Delete Oldest Log Delete All Logs Delete All But Current URL to Post Logs Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Log Action at Near Full Note 5 is the factory default setting Determine and set how the printer responds when the hard disk is nearly full Notes None is the factory default setting The value defined in Log Near Full Level determines when this action is triggered Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit 100MB Note None is the factory default setting Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs E mail Address to Send Logs Log File Prefix Spe
265. o Plug one end of the power cord into the printer and the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet Step 4 Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet Does other electrical equipment work Step 5 Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are inserted in the correct ports Are the cables inserted in the correct ports Unplug the other electrical equipment and then turn on the printer If the printer does not work then reconnect the other electrical equipment Go to step 6 Go to step 5 Make sure to match the following The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer The appropriate Ethernet cable with the Ethernet port Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors uninterruptible power supplies or extension cords Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors uninterruptible power supplies or extension cords power cord directly to a properly grounded electrical outlet Step 6 Turn on the switch or Go to step 7 Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or breaker reset the breaker Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker Step 7 Connect the printer Go to step 8 Step 8 Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the printer and the other to the computer print server option or other network device Is the printer cable secur
266. o custom type name load orientation 255 Change paper source to paper size load orientation 255 Change paper source to paper type paper size load orientation 256 335 changing output file type e mailing 98 Check tray x connection 256 checking an unresponsive printer 269 checking status of parts and supplies 225 checking the status of parts and supplies 225 checking the virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 235 cleaning exterior of the printer 223 scanner glass 224 cleaning the printer 223 Close finisher rear door 256 Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job 2yy xx 257 Close front door 256 Close rear door 256 collate copy options 94 collating copies 89 color quality troubleshooting prints on color transparencies appear dark when projected 286 Complex page some data may not have printed 39 257 confidential data information on securing 222 confidential jobs modifying print settings 81 confidential print jobs 80 printing from a Macintosh computer 81 printing from Windows 81 Confidential Print menu 159 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 57 257 configuration information wireless network 48 Configure MP menu 136 configuring supply notifications imaging unit 236 Index supply notifications maintenance kit 236 supply notifications toner cartridge 236 configuring e mail settings 95 configuring port settings 51 configuring supply notifications 23
267. o a shared network folder You can define up to 30 unique folder destinations Notes alts The printer must have permission to write to the destinations From the computer where the destination is specified use sharing security and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a write access For help see the documentation that came with your operating system The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Doeither of the following Click Set up Scan to Network gt Click here Click Settings Apps Apps Management Scan to Network 3 Specify the destinations and then customize the settings Notes See the mouse over help beside some of the fields for a description of the setting To make sure the location settings of the destination are correct type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer see Finding the IP address of the computer on page 20 Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the specified destination is located 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Scan to Network on the
268. o an analog phone service or the correct digital connector Step 7 Check for a dial tone Did you hear a dial tone Go to step 7 Go to step 8 Connect the printer to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector Try calling the fax number to make sure that it is working properly f the telephone lineis being used by another device then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax f you are using the On Hook Dial feature then turn up the volume to check if you hear a dial tone Troubleshooting Action Step 8 Temporarily disconnect other equipment such as answering machines computers with modems or telephone line splitters between the printer and the telephone line and then try sending or receiving a fax Can you send or receive a fax Yes The problem is solved 308 No Go to step 9 Step 9 a Temporarily disable call waiting Contact your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling call waiting b Try sending or receiving a fax Can you send or receive a fax Step 10 a Temporarily disable voice mail service For more information contact your telephone company Note If you want to use both voice mail and the printer then consider adding a second telephone line for the printer b Try sending or receiving a fax Can you send or receive a fax The problem is solved The proble
269. o setting does not guarantee that the page will print 6 Jam access area Printer control panel message What to do Automatic x page jam open ADF to clear Remove all paper from the ADF tray and then remove the document feeder jam 28y xx jammed paper ADF Standard bin x page jam clear standard Remove the jammed paper bin 20y xx Clearing jams Jam access area 3 Front door 4 Multipurpose feeder 5 Trayl 6 Tray x 7 Rear door Printer control panel message x page jam open front door 20y xx x page jam clear manual feeder 25y xx x page jam remove tray 1 to clear duplex 23y xx x page jam open tray x 24y xx x page jam open rear door 20y xx 240 What to do Open the front door then remove the toner cartridge and imaging unit and then the jammed paper Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder and then remove the jammed paper Pull out tray 1 completely then push the front duplex flap down and then remove the jammed paper Note You may need to open the rear door to clear some 23y xx paper jams Pull the indicated tray out and then remove the jammed paper Open the rear door and then remove the jammed paper 8 Finisher rear door 9 Finisher output bin x page jam remove all pages from the finisher s output bin Leave paper in bin 45y xx x page jam remove all pages from the output bin Leave paper in
270. og or Fax Call Log Blocking junk faxes 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup gt Block No Name Fax Notes This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or have no fax name n the Banned Fax List field enter the phone numbers or type the fax names of specific fax callers you want to block Faxing 121 Canceling an outgoing fax Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning When using the ADF touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next PageandFinish the Job appear Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory 1 Onthe home screen touch Cancel Jobs The Cancel Jobs screen appears 2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel Only three jobs appear on the screen touch the down arrow until the job you want appears and then touch the job you want to cancel 3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears the selected jobs are delet
271. om the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options Advanced Imaging b Adjust the settings of the following Background removal Reduce the current setting Shadow detail Reduce the current background removal setting c Resend the copy job Do pages show washed out or overexposed prints Partial document or photo copies Action Step 1 Check the placement of the document or photo Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Is the document or photo loaded correctly Advanced Options Advanced Imaging Sharpness select a lower Yes Go to step 9 Go to step 10 Contact customer support Yes Go to step 2 304 No The problem is solved The problem is solved The problem is solved No Place the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Troubleshooting 305 Action Yes No Step 2 Go to step 3 Change the paper size Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in the setting to match the tray paper loaded in the tray or load the tray with paper that matches the paper size setting From the Paper menu on the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in the tray Step 3 The problem is solved Contact customer a Specify the paper size Depending on your operat
272. on lets you type a file name for the scan image Save As Shortcut This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a number Original Size This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to scan When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes letter and legal size pages Scanning 130 Darkness This option lets you adjust how light or dark the scanned documents are in relation to the original document Resolution This option lets you adjust the output quality of your file Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size Send As This option lets you set the output type for the scan image Select one of the following PDF Use to create a single file with multiple pages The PDF can be sent as a secured or compressed file TIFF Use to create multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG JPEG Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document e XPS Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages RTF Use to create a file in editable format TXT Use to create ASCII text file with no formatting Content This option l
273. on the keypad then touch Resume to return to the home screen Understanding the copy options Copy from This option opens a screen where you can select the paper size of the original document Touch the paper size that matches the original document To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width touch Mixed Sizes Tosetthe printer to automatically detect the size of the original document touch Auto Size Sense Copy to This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded fthe settings for Copy from and Copy to are different then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference e f the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays then touch Manual Feeder and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder When Copy to is set to Auto Size Match each copy matches the paper size of the original document If a matching paper size is not in one of the trays then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper in a tray or multipurpose feeder Scale This option lets you scale the document from 2596 to 40096 of the original document size You can also set automatic scaling When copying to a different paper size such as from legal size to letter size paper set the Copy from and C
274. ono impulsi remoti in Svizzera E necessario utilizzare il filtro poich gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera Notice to Users in the European Union Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC 1999 5 EC and 2009 125 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy related products Notices 328 Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 1 Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information Regulatory notices for wireless products This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters for example but not limite
275. onserving 213 storing 227 using genuine Lexmark 225 using recycled paper 213 supplies ordering ADF separator roller 226 imaging unit 226 maintenance kit 226 staple cartridges 226 toner cartridge 225 Supply needed to complete job 268 supply notifications configuring 236 supported flash drives 79 supported paper sizes 72 T TCP IP menu 146 344 telecommunication notices 324 325 326 327 the scanner does not respond 311 tips card stock 69 labels paper 68 letterhead 67 on using envelopes 67 transparencies 67 tips on using envelopes 67 toner cartridge ordering 225 replacing 227 toner cartridges recycling 217 toner darkness adjusting 77 Too many flash options installed 58 268 Too many trays attached 58 268 touch screen buttons 18 transparencies copying on 85 loading multipurpose feeder 58 tips 67 trays linking 64 65 loading 53 unlinking 64 65 troubleshooting an application error has occurred 316 cannot open Embedded Web Server 316 checking an unresponsive printer 269 contacting customer support 317 fax and e mail functions are not set up 305 solving basic printer problems 269 the scanner does not respond 311 troubleshooting color quality prints on color transparencies appear dark when projected 286 troubleshooting copy copier does not respond 302 partial document or photo copies 304 poor copy quality 303 poor scanned image quality 314 Index scanner unit does not close 302 313 troubleshoot
276. ont of the bin as it stacks To open the paper stop pull it so that it flips forward Mum b Note Close the paper stop when moving the printer to another location Loading paper and specialty media 64 Linking and unlinking trays The printer links trays when the specified paper size and type are the same When a linked tray becomes empty paper feeds from the next linked tray To prevent trays from linking assign a unique custom paper type name Linking and unlinking trays 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu 3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking Tolink trays make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray Tounlink trays make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray 4 Click Submit Note You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel For more information see Setting the paper size and type on page 53 Warning Potential Damage Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer The temperature of the fuse
277. ontrol panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Serial Buffer Disabled Auto 3K to maximum size allowed Job Buffering Off On Auto Protocol DTR DTR DSR XON XOFF XON XOFF DTR XONXOFF DTRDSR Set the size of the serial input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes e Off is the factory default setting The printer does not buffer print jobs on the printer hard disk On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updat
278. ontroller board Additional printer setup 32 4 Push the card firmly into place Warning Potential Damage Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the controller board Note The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush with the controller board Installing an Internal Solutions Port The controller board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP Note This task requires a flat head screwdriver A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Additional printer setup 33 Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors 1 Open the controller board access door 2 Lightly press the stop on the left side of the access door and then slide the access door to remove it 3 Unpack the ISP kit Note Make sure to remove and discard the small cable attached to the white connector Additional printer setup 34 ISP solution Screw to attach the ISP
279. oory esses nennen eene nne e eian ae i T i sanas essen eiii as se rn nnn sanas en 219 Erasing non volatile MEMOLY ccccccccccecesssssessesnsnsseecececesceseesessensnseeeeseeeeecescesesnsaeeseeeeseeeceseessensnsaaeaaess 220 Erasing printer hard disk memoory sese nennen enne n nennen nnns n nene nennen nnn 220 Configuring printer hard disk encryption esses eene nnne ener nn nenas nnns an nnns 221 Finding printer security information cesses eene eene nene nennen nns Eana n nnne nnns 222 Maintaining the prilter drove e aeu ER en EE unk SENS Rye axe aree iid Clearing printeripalts un eee rr THO en ere S eterno ER Ee HR Reed Do eT ieee ROSE TS 223 Gleaning theprinter ue ertet teme ceteris fibi obtu retento best 223 Cleaning the seanner glass vet e eee pe certe qr ende e E edt Ped ak 224 Checking the status of parts and SUPPIICS cccsesecsccceecescsssnsnsseeceeceeeseesssnsaeeeeeeecessesensaneeseeeessaeess 225 Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel cccsssccccesssssseceecesssseceeesssssseeees 225 Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server c ccccccssssssceecesssseeeeeessssnees 225 Ordering supplies rete tre reet ere acento eese ee aine acere iue ek Eh ca E a aee a ene e vaso DERE e AERA TTE ES 225 Using genuine Lexmark parts and SUPPLieS ccccccccessssssecessssceecescses
280. opy to paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying To decrease or increase the value by 1 touch or onthe printer control panel To make a continuous decrease or increase in value hold the button for two seconds or more Darkness This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document Sides Duplex This option lets you make one or two sided copies from one or two sided original documents Copying 94 Collate This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document Copies This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed Content This option lets you set the original document type and source Select from the following content types Text The content of the original document is mostly text or line art Text Photo The original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo The original document is mostly a photo or an image Graphics The original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Select from the following content sources Color Laser The original document was printed using a color laser printer Inkjet The original document was printed using an inkjet printer e Magazine The original document is from a magazine Brochure The original document is from
281. or light on the printer control panel is blinking green Wait until the printer is ready then view the held jobs list and then print the documents Go to step 3 Check if the flash drive is supported For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives see Supported flash drives and file types on page 79 Does the error message still appear Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Check for an error message on the display b Clear the message Does the error message still appear Step 4 Go to step 5 The problem is solved Step 5 Check if the USB port is disabled by the system support person Does the error message still appear Print jobs do not print Action Step 1 check if you have selected the correct printer Note If the printer is not the default printer then you must select the printer for each document that you want to print b Resend the print job Do the jobs print a From the document you are trying to print open the Print dialog and Contact customer support Yes The problem is solved The problem is solved Go to step 2 Troubleshooting Action Step 2 a Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on and if Ready appears on the printer display b Resend the print job Do the jobs print Yes The problem is solved No Go to step 3 278 Step 3 Ifan error message appears on
282. or wait for a prompt to load it Do not load too much paper Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator Do not slide the paper into the tray Load paper as shown in the illustration Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing tightly against the paper or envelopes Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper Clearing jams 239 Use recommended paper Use only recommended paper or specialty media Do not load wrinkled creased damp bent or curled paper Flex fan and straighten paper before loading it Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Do not mix paper sizes weights or types in the same tray Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations Understanding jam messages and locations When a jam occurs a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the printer display Open the doors covers and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam Notes When Jam Assist is set to On the printer automatically flushes blank pages or pages with partial prints to the standard bin after a jammed page has been cleared Check your printed output stack for discarded pages When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto the printer reprints jammed pages However the Aut
283. ormation see E mailing on page 95 Scan to Computer Scan a document and then save it to a predefined folder on a host computer For more information see Setting up Scan to Computer on page 128 Scan to FTP Scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol FTP server For more information see Scanning to an FTP address on page 125 t Scan to Network Scan a document and then send it to a network shared folder For more information see Setting up Scan to Network on page 24 M P Setting up and using the home screen applications 22 Activating the home screen applications Finding information about the home screen applications Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications Before you can use these applications you must first activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server For more information on accessing the Embedded Web Server see Accessing the Embedded Web Server on page 20 For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications do the following 1 Go to http support lexmark com 2 Click Software Solutions and then select either of the following Scan to Network This lets you find information about the Scan to Network application e Other Applications This lets you find information about the other applications 3 Click the Manuals tab and then select the document for the home screen application Setting up Fo
284. ort disabled 56 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Enable the USB port From the printer control panel navigate to Network Ports USB Buffer Auto Note The printer discards any data received through the USB port Supply needed to complete job Do either of the following Install the missing supply to complete the job Cancel the current job Too many flash options installed 58 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the extra flash memory 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Too many trays attached 58 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the extra trays 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Unformatted flash detected 53 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing Format the flash memory Note If the error message remains then the flash memory may be defective and needs to be replaced Unsupported disk Remove the unsupported printer hard disk and then insert a supported one Troubleshooting 269 Unsupported option in slot x 55 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the u
285. ot set up Contact system administrator 258 fax setup country or region specific 111 digital telephone service 110 DSL connection 108 standard telephone line connection 104 VoIP 109 Fax Station Name not set up Contact system administrator 258 Fax Station Number not set up Contact system administrator 259 fax troubleshooting caller ID is not shown 306 can receive but not send faxes 309 Index can send but not receive faxes 308 cannot send or receive a fax 306 received fax has poor print quality 310 faxing blocking junk faxes 120 canceling a fax job 121 changing resolution 119 configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time 116 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 118 creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 119 distinctive ring service 115 fax setup 103 forwarding faxes 122 holding faxes 121 making a fax lighter or darker 120 sending a fax at a scheduled time 118 sending using the printer control panel 116 setting the date and time 116 setting the fax number 115 setting the outgoing fax name 115 viewing a faxlog 120 FCC notices 319 324 328 filename scan options 129 finding more information about the printer 9 finding printer IP address 20 finisher finishing features 75 supported paper sizes 75 finisher features 75 Finishing menu 202 firmware card 27 flash drive printing from 78 Flash Drive menu 194 flash drives supported file types 79 font sample list printing 82
286. ote 0 is the factory default setting Flash Drive menu Scan Settings Format Specify the file format PDF pdf Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps RTF rtf TXT txt PDF Settings Configure the PDF settings PDF Version Notes 1 2 1 7 A la e 1 5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version A 1b Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression This menu item appears only when a formatted working hard disk is installed e Off is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF Secure PDF requires you to enter your password twice PDF Compression Normal High Secure PDF Off On Searchable PDF Off On Content Type Specify the content of the original document Text Note Text Photo is the factory default setting Graphics Text Photo Photo Understanding the printer menus Use Content Source Black White Laser Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other To Specify how the original document was produced Note Black White Laser is the factory default setting 195 Color Off On Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color Note On is the factory default setting Resolution 75 dpi 150 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch dpi Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting Darkness 1 9
287. otes f the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information f you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number Scanning to an FTP address Scanning to an FTP address using the printer control panel 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the printer control panel navigate to FTP gt FTP gt type the FTP address gt Done gt Send It Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the printer control panel press on the keypad and then enter the FTP shortcut number 4 Touch ZS gt Send It Scanning a
288. otice The installed optional modem is in compliance with Japanese Telecommunication Law and has been Certified by JATE with Certification Number A11 0160001 C R Lexmark International Inc LEX M03 002 pug A11 0160001JP Using this product in Switzerland This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter Lexmark part number 80D1877 to be installed on any line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland The filter must be used as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse Cet appareil n cessite l utilisation d un filtre de tonalit de facturation suisse n9 de r f rence Lexmark 80D1877 devant tre install sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse Ce filtre doit tre utilis pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes t l phoniques suisses Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz F r dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Z hlzeichen bertragung Lexmark Teilenummer 80D1877 f r jede Leitung installiert werden ber die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte bertragen werden Die Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind Uso del prodotto in Svizzera Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero codice Lexmark 80D1877 da installare su tutte le linee che ricev
289. ount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it goes into a reduced power state Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Saving money and the environment 216 Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings General Settings Timeouts 3 From the Hibernate Timeout menu select the number of hours days weeks or months you want for the printer to wait before it goes into a reduced power state 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the printer control panel navigate to ia gt Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts gt Hibernate Timeout 2 Select the amount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it enters Hibernate mode 3 Touch v Using Schedule Power Modes Schedule Power Modes lets you schedule when the printer goes into a reduced power state or into Ready state Note This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP a
290. our original document XPS Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages RTF Use this to create a file in editable format TXT Use this to create an ASCII text file with no formatting Content This option lets you set the original document type and source Select from the following content types Text The content of the original document is mostly text or line art Text Photo The original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo The original document is mostly a photo or an image Graphics The original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Select from the following content sources Color Laser The original document was printed using a color laser printer Inkjet The original document was printed using an inkjet printer Magazine The original document is from a magazine Brochure The original document is from a brochure Black White Laser The original document was printed using a mono laser printer Photo Film The original document is a photo from film e Newspaper The original document is from a newspaper Other The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Page Setup This option lets you change the following settings Sides Duplex This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper This also identifies what needs to
291. panel 16 Printer status Solid green The printer is on but idle Blinking red The printer requires user intervention Sleep button light Printer status Off The printer is off idle or in Ready state Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode Blinking amber The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode Blinking amber for 0 1 second then goes The printer is in Hibernate mode completely off for 1 9 seconds in a slow pulsing pattern Understanding the home screen Whenthe printer is turned on the display shows a basic screen referred to as the home screen Touch the home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying faxing or scanning to open the menu screen or to respond to messages Note Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded solutions Touch To 1 Change Language Launch the Change Language pop up window that lets you change the primary language of the printer 2 Copy Access the Copy menus and make copies 3 Fax Access the Fax menus and send fax 4 E mail Access the E mail menus and send e mails 5 FTP Access the File Transfer Protocol FTP menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server 6 Arrows Scroll up or down 7 Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms 8 Menu icon Access the printer menus
292. paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy Advanced Options Custom Job On v gt Copy It Note When the end of a set is reached the scan screen appears 4 Loadthe next document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass and then touch Scan from automatic feeder or Scan from flatbed Note Change the scan job settings if necessary 5 f you have another document to scan then repeat the previous step Otherwise touch Finish the job Copying 92 Placing information on copies Placing a header or footer on pages 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy Advanced Options Header Footer select where you want to place the header or footer select the type of header or footer you want 4 Enter the
293. paper where the temperature is 21 C 70 F and the relative humidity is 40 percent Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 24 C 65 75 F with relative humidity between 40 and 60 percent Store paper in cartons on a pallet or shelf rather than on the floor Store individual packages on a flat surface Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer The carton and wrapper help keep the paper clean dry and flat Supported paper sizes types and weights Supported paper sizes Paper size and dimension Standard Optional 250 or Multipurpose Scanner Duplex 550 sheet tray 550 sheettray feeder glass printing 3x5 vV A 4x6 vV A A4 V V 210 x 297 mm 8 27 x 11 7 in A5 V X 148 x 210 mm 5 83 x 8 27 in A6 V X 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 83 in JIS B5 J X 182 x 257 mm 7 17 x 10 1 in Letter V V 215 9 x 279 4 mm 8 5 x 11 in Paper is supported only if the paper size setting is set to Universal Paper is supported in two sided duplex printing only if the width is at least 210 mm 8 27 in and the length is at least 279 4 mm 11 in The smallest supported Universal paper size is supported only in the multipurpose feeder Paper and specialty media guide 73 Paper size and dimension Standard Optional 250 or Multipurpose ADF Scanne
294. parated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly Print a network setup page or menu settings page and then locate the IP address in the TCP IP section b Click Settings Fax Settings Analog Fax Setup In the Max Speed menu click one of the following e 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 d Click Submit and then resend the fax Is the fax print quality satisfactory Check if the shortcut number has been set for the telephone number Yes The problem is solved Yes The problem is solved The problem is solved 310 No Contact customer support Go to step 2 Go to step 3 Troubleshooting Action Step 3 Replace the toner cartridge and then resend the fax Is the fax print quality satisfactory Solving scanner problems The scanner does not respond on page 311 Scan job was not successful on page 312 Scanner unit does not close on page 313 Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer on page 313 Poor scanned image quality on page 314 Partial document or photo scans on page 315 Cannot scan from a computer on page 315 The scanner does not respond When Cartridge low 88 xy appears replace the cartridge Yes The problem is solved 311 No Contact customer support Check if the power cord
295. per menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Note Set the correct paper size and paper type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Loading the multipurpose feeder Use the multipurpose feeder when printing on different paper sizes and types or specialty media such as card stock transparencies paper labels and envelopes You can also use it for single page print jobs on letterhead 1 Open the multipurpose feeder Loading paper and specialty media a Pull the multipurpose feeder extender b Pull the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open 59 Loading paper and specialty media 60 2 Squeeze the tab on the left width guide and then move the guides for the paper you are loading 3 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading e Flexsheetsof paper back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface Hold transparencies by the edges Flex the stack of transparencies back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Straighten the edges on a level surface Note Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies Be careful not to scratch them Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Straighten the edges on a level surface 4 Load the paper or specialty media Loading paper and specialty media 61 Notes Do not force paper or specia
296. pers carbonless copy paper CCP or no carbon required NCR paper Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser e Preprinted papers that require a registration the precise print location on the page greater or lesser than 2 5 mm 0 10 inch such as optical character recognition OCR forms In some cases registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms Coated papers erasable bond synthetic papers thermal papers Rough edged rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers Recycled papers that fail EN12281 2002 European Paper weighing less than 60 g m 16 Ib Multiple part forms or documents Selecting paper Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble free printing To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality Always use new undamaged paper Before loading paper know the recommended printable side of the paper This information is usually indicated on the paper package Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Paper and specialty media guide 71 Do not mix paper sizes types or weights in the same tray mixing results in jams Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead Use these guidelines when selec
297. pick up calls two rings after the answering machine For example if the answering machine picks up calls after four rings then set the printer to pick up after six rings This way the answering machine picks up calls first and your voice calls are received If the call is a fax then the printer detects the fax signal on the line and takes over the call f you subscribe to a distinctive ring service provided by your telephone company then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer Otherwise the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes automatically Faxing 107 Setup 3 Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service To connect 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the 4 port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack 3 Connect the telephone to the port of the printer Tips for this setup This setup works best if you subscribe to a distinctive ring service If you have distinctive ring service then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer Otherwise the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes automatically f you have only one telephone number on your line then you need to set the printer to receive faxes manually Auto Answer Off When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones press
298. ply the changes For Macintosh users 1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu navigate to the list of printers and then select gt IP 2 Type the IP address in the address field Additional printer setup 52 3 Apply the changes Setting up serial printing Windows only After installing the serial or communication COM port configure the printer and the computer Note Serial printing reduces print speed 1 Set the parameters in the printer a From the control panel navigate to the menu for the port settings b Locate the menu for the serial port settings and then adjust the settings if necessary C Savethe settings 2 From your computer open the printers folder and then select your printer 3 Open the printer properties and then select the COM port from the list 4 Set the COM port parameters in Device Manager Use the Run dialog box to open the command prompt and then type devmgmt msc Verifying printer setup When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following Menu settings page Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page If an option you installed is not listed then it is not installed correctly Remove the option and then install it again Network setup page If your printer has Ethernet or wireless
299. possible changes in the printer The printer firmware has been updated The tray for the print job has been removed The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a different printer model From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Defective flash detected 51 Try one or more of the following Replace the defective flash memory card From the printer control panel touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing Cancel the current print job Disk full 62 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing Delete fonts macros and other data stored in the printer hard disk Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity Troubleshooting 258 Disk must be formatted for use in this device From the printer control panel touch Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message Note Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk Disk near full Securely clearing disk space Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Delete fonts macros and other data stored on the printer hard disk Install a hard disk with higher capacity Error reading USB drive Remove USB An
300. pply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in later editions Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time References in this publication to products programs or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates Any reference to a product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products programs or services except those expressly designated by the manufacturer are the user s responsibility For Lexmark technical support visit http support lexmark com For information on supplies and downloads
301. pty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled Saving money and the environment 218 To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label You can also do the following 1 Goto www lexmark com recycle 2 From the Toner Cartridges section select your country or region 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Securing the printer 219 Securing the printer Statement of Volatility Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings and user data Types of memory Description Volatile memory Your printer uses standard Random Access Memory RAM to temporarily buffer user data during simple print and copy jobs Non volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non volatile memory EEPROM and NAND flash memory Both types are used to store the operating system device settings network information scanner and bookmark settings and embedded solutions Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed The printer hard diskis designed for device specific functionality This lets the device retain buffered user data from complex scan print copy and fax jobs as well as form data and font data Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the follo
302. r Notes Off is the factory default setting The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the parallel port Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the computer is turned on Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a strobe Note On is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 153 Use To Mac Binary PS Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs On Notes off Auto Auto is the factory default setting Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs ENA Address Set the network address information for an external print server YYY YYY YYV VVY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Netmask Set the netmask information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Gateway Set the gateway information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Serial x menu Note This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed Use To PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch
303. r The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Faxing 123 Resolution This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size Select one of the following Standard Use this when faxing most documents Fine 200 dpi Use this when faxing documents with small prints Super fine 300 dpi Use this when faxing documents with fine details Ultra fine 600 dpi Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos Darkness This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document Delayed Send This option lets you send a fax at a later time or date Page Setup This option lets you change the following settings Sides Duplex This specifies if the original document is printed on one side or on both sides of the page duplex This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax Orientation This specifies the orientation of the original document and then changes the Sides Duplex and Binding settings to match the orientation Binding This specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Scan Preview This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the fax When the first page is scanned the
304. r then to completely stop product power consumption disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet Total energy usage It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode s energy usage Industry Canada compliance statement This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Standard ICES 003 Avis de conformit aux normes de l industrie du Canada Cet appareil num rique de classe B est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux quipements pouvant causer des interf rences NMB 003 Notices 324 Licensing notices All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the documentation CD HAO vce HE MIC LCOV I BRRAENCWSGR ROBES WE L TOET CORBI JAA BRR CT CORBIS ZEPSECHUHS SIC Ee AME LTWETA CO HEBD TVAOCTLEY a Vaca RICH LCA SSL SRS eS E TILDET HAA BIC H s CIE LW ERO MWA LTS KAU VCCI B European Community EC directives conformity This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108
305. r Duplex 550 sheet tray 550 sheettray feeder glass printing Legal V J 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in Executive 184 2 x 266 7 mm 7 25 x 10 5 in Oficio M xico 215 9 x 340 4 mm 8 5 x 13 4 in Folio 215 9 x 330 2 mm 8 5 x 13 in Statement 139 7 x 215 9 mm 5 5 x 8 5 in Universal 76 2 x 127 mm 3x5 in to 215 9 x 359 92 mm 8 5 x 14 17 in 7 3 4 Envelope Monarch 98 4 x 190 5 mm 3 875 x 7 5 in 9 Envelope 98 4 x 226 1 mm 3 875 x 8 9 in 10 Envelope 104 8 x 241 3 mm 4 12 x 9 5 in DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm 4 33 x 8 66 in C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm 6 38 x 9 01 in lt lt x x B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 in Paper is supported only if the paper size setting is set to Universal Paper is supported in two sided duplex printing only if the width is at least 210 mm 8 27 in and the length is at least 279 4 mm 11 in The smallest supported Universal paper size is supported only in the multipurpose feeder Paper and specialty media guide 74 Paper size and dimension Standard 550 sheet tray Optional 250 or Multipurpose ADF Scanner Duplex 550 sheet tray feeder glass printing Other Envelope 85 7 x 165 mm to 215 9 x 355 6 mm 3 375 x 6 50 in to 8 5 x 14 in v 1 Paper is supported only if the paper size setting is set to Universal 2 Paper is supported in two sided duplex printin
306. r Saver Horizontal Notes Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Horizontal is the factory default setting Vertical Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation Paper Saver Orientation Specify the orientation of a multiple page document Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer chooses between portrait and Landscape landscape Portrait Paper Saver Border Print a border when using Paper Saver None Note None is the factory default setting Solid Staple Job Specify whether printed output is stapled Off Notes On e Off is the factory default setting This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed Run Stapler Test Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly Note This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed Quality menu Use To Print Resolution Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch 300 dpi Note 600 dpi is the factory default setting 600 dpi 1200 dpi 1200 Image Q l 2400 Image Q J Understanding the printer menus Use Pixel Boost Off Fonts Horizontally Vertically Both directions 204 To Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity in order to enhance images horizontally or vertically or to enhance fonts Note Off is the factory default setting Toner Darkness 1 10
307. r respective owners AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc Federal Communications Commission FCC compliance information statement This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult your point of purchase or service represent
308. r varies according to the specified paper type Printing issues may occur if settings are not properly configured Creating a custom name for a paper type Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Names 3 Select a custom name and then type a custom paper type name 4 Click Submit 5 Click Custom Types and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name Loading paper and specialty media 65 Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to Paper Menu Custom Names 2 Select a custom name and then type a custom paper type name 3 Touch A 4 Touch Custom Types and then verify that the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name Assigning a custom paper type Using the Embedded Web Server Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 1
309. racters that have jagged or uneven edges M Yes Contact customer support 284 No The problem is solved Printer is printing blank pages Action Step 1 a Checkif there is packing material left on the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Checkifthe packing materialis properly removed from the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Reinstall the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the printer still printing blank pages Yes Go to step 2 The problem is solved Step 2 a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Firmly shake the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Reinstall the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the printer still printing blank pages Go to step 3 The problem is solved Se E Troubleshooting 285 Step 3 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job support Is the printer still printing blank pages Clipped pages or images Leading edge Trail
310. rates an e mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage 4 Click Submit Managing the printer 237 Restoring factory default settings If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference then print a menu settings page before restoring the factory default settings For more information see Printing a menu settings page on page 52 If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings then perform the Wipe All Settings option For more information see Erasing non volatile memory on page 220 Warning Potential Damage Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings Exceptions include the display language custom sizes and messages and network port menu settings All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not affected From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Factory Defaults gt Restore Now gt ZS Clearing jams 238 Clearing jams Avoiding jams Load paper properly Make sure paper lies flat in the tray Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing Do not load a tray while the printer is printing Load it before printing
311. remove the optional tray slide the latch on the right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down Before setting up the printer make sure there is adequate clearance around it Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer s authorized replacement Use only the telecommunications RJ 11 cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Make sure that all external connections such as Ethernet and telephone system connections are properly installed in their marked plug in ports Safety information 8 This product is designed tested and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer s components The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replaceme
312. rientation Auto Landscape Portrait Specify the orientation of a multiple page document Note Auto is the factory default setting Paper Saver Border None Solid Print a border on each page image Note None is the factory default setting Separator Sheets Off Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Separator Sheet Source Tray x Multipurpose Feeder Blank Pages Do Not Print Print Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted Notes e Off is the factory default setting Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to 1 2 3 1 2 3 If Collate is set to 1 1 1 2 2 2 then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document Specify the paper source for separator sheets Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting OCR Settings menu Auto Rotate Automatically rotate scanned documents for proper orientation On Note On is the factory default setting Off Despeckle Remove specks from a scanned image off Note Off is the factory default setting On Inverse Detection On Off
313. rints then clean the scanner glass and the ADF scanner glass on glass using a clean lint free cloth dampened with water page 224 Is the scanner glass clean Step 4 Go to step 5 See Print quality Send a print job and then check for print quality problems problems on a From the General Settings menu adjust the Eco Mode settings page 283 b From the Copy menu adjust the toner darkness c If the print remains faded then replace the toner cartridge Is the print quality satisfactory Step 5 Go to step 6 Place the document or The problem is solved Go to step 8 a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Go to step 7 Change the Content Type and Content Source settings to match the document being scanned Troubleshooting Action Step 8 Check for patterns on print a From the Copy screen navigate to setting b Onthe Copy screen make sure no scaling is being selected Do patterns appear on prints Step 9 Check for missing or faded text on prints a From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options Advanced Imaging b Adjust the settings Improve sharpness Increase the sharpness setting Remove background Reduce the current background removal setting Increase contrast Increase the current setting Decrease shadow Reduce the current setting Do prints have missing or faded text Step 10 Check for washed out or overexposed output a Fr
314. rk authorized supplies dealers in your area In other countries or regions go to www lexmark com or contact the place where you purchased the printer Note All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter or A4 size plain paper Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts Use of third party supplies or parts may affect the performance reliability or life of the printer and its imaging components Use of third party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage Damage caused by the use of third party supplies or parts is not covered by the warranty All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts and may deliver unpredictable results if third party supplies or parts are used Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components Ordering a toner cartridge Notes The estimated cartridge yield is based on approximately 596 coverage per page Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield Part name Part number Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 24B6035 Maintaining the printer 226 Ordering an imaging unit Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause imaging unit parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner from toner cartridge For more information on replacing th
315. rk on the World Wide Web Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee Extent of limited warranty Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by Modification or unauthorized attachments Accidents misuse abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user s guides manuals instructions or guidance Unsuitable physical or operating environment Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications Refurbishment repair refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products supplies or parts Notices 333 Products supplies parts materials such as toners and inks software or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY ANY W
316. rms and Favorites Note A later version of this User s Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator s Guide of this application To check for updates of this User s Guide go to http support lexmark com Use To E Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen Note The printer must have permission to access the network folder FTP site or Web site where the bookmark is stored From the computer where the bookmark is stored use sharing security and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access For help see the documentation that came with your operating system 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management gt Forms and Favorites 3 Click Add and then customize the settings Notes See the mouse over help beside each field for a description of the setting To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct type the correct IP address of the host computer where the bookmark is located For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer see Finding the IP address of the computer on page 20 Make sure the printer has access righ
317. rn the printer back on If the error occurs again then 1 2 3 4 Turn off the printer Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Remove the tray Contact customer support From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and resume the job Close rear door Close the rear door of the printer Close finisher rear door Close the rear door of the finisher Close front door Close the front door of the printer Troubleshooting 257 Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job 2yy xx Try one or more of the following Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the last successful scan job Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job Note This does not cancel the scan job All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying faxing or e mailing Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job Complex page some data may not have printed 39 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing Cancel current print job Install additional printer memory Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 57 Held jobs are invalidated because of the following
318. rned on the touch screen displays a list of functions Touch Wipe Disk and then touch one of the following e Wipe disk fast This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass Wipe disk secure This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times followed by a verification pass A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220 22 M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping Notes Astatus bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task Securing the printer 221 Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 5 Touch Back Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Configuring printer hard disk encryption Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable
319. roducts To return Lexmark products for recycling 1 Goto www lexmark com recycle 2 Find the product type you want to recycle and then select your country or region from the list 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Note Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local recycling center Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept Recycling Lexmark packaging Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions energy savings and natural resource savings Lexmark cartons are 10096 recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area When you return a cartridge to Lexmark you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in Lexmark will recycle the box Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling One hundred percent of the em
320. rrect printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser Note Depending on the network settings you may need to type https instead of http before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server Step 2 Check if the printer is turned on Is the printer turned on Go to step 3 Turn on the printer Troubleshooting 317 Action Yes No Step 3 Go to step 4 Contact your system Check if the network connection is working support person Is the network connection working Step 4 Go to step 5 Tighten the cable Make sure the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure connection For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer Are the cable connections to the printer and print server secure Step 5 Go to step 6 Contact your system Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers support person Note Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server Are the Web proxy servers disabled Step 6 The problem is solved Contact customer Access the Embedded Web Server again by typing the correct IP address support in the address field Did the Embedded Web Server open Contacting customer support When you contact customer support you will need to be able to describe the problem you are experiencing the message on the printer display
321. rsk Nederlands Svenska Suomi Portugues Russian Polski Swiss German Swiss French Korean Magyar Turkish Czech Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Japanese Custom Key x Paper Sizes US Metric Scan to PC Port Range port range To Run the setup wizard Specify a language and custom key information for the display keyboard Specify the unit of measurement for paper sizes Notes US is the factory default setting The initial setting is determined by your country or region selection in the initial setup wizard Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking firewall Note 9751 12000 is the factory default setting 164 Understanding the printer menus Displayed Information Left side Right side Custom Text x 165 Specify what is displayed on the upper corners of the home screen For Left side and Right side select from the following options None IP Address Hostname Contact Name Location Date Time mDNS DDNS Service Name Zero Configuration Name Custom Text x Model Name Notes P Address is the factory default setting for Left side Date Time is the factory default setting for Right side Displayed Information continued Black Toner Customize the displayed information for Black Toner Select from the following options When to display Do not display Display Message to display Default Alternate Default text entry Alternate t
322. rvice fax connecting to 115 documents printing from Macintosh 77 from Windows 77 DSL filter 108 duplexing 88 Index E Eco Mode setting 214 Edit Security Setups menu 156 Embedded Web Server accessing 13 20 adjusting brightness 216 administrator settings 235 checking the status of parts 225 checking the status of supplies 225 creating a fax destination shortcut 118 creating an FTP shortcut 125 creating e mail shortcuts 96 functions 13 initial fax setup 103 modifying confidential print settings 81 networking settings 235 problem accessing 316 scanning to a computer using 127 setting up e mail alerts 235 using 13 Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide where to find 235 Embedded Web Server Security Administrator s Guide where to find 222 emission notices 319 323 324 328 329 encrypting the printer hard disk 221 enlarging a copy 88 envelopes loading multipurpose feeder 58 tips on using 67 environmental settings conserving supplies 213 Eco Mode 214 Hibernate mode 215 Hibernate Timeout 215 printer display brightness adjusting 216 Quiet Mode 214 Schedule Power Modes 216 Sleep Mode 215 Erase Temporary Data Files menu 159 erasing hard disk memory 220 erasing non volatile memory 220 erasing volatile memory 219 Error reading USB drive Remove USB 258 Error reading USB hub Remove hub 258 Ethernet network preparing to set up for Ethernet printing 48 Ethernet port 46 Ethernet setup preparing for an 48
323. s The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax enter the fax number Options Faxing 120 4 From the Resolution area touch the arrows to select the resolution you want Note Select a resolution from Standard fastest speed to Ultra Fine best quality at a reduced speed 5 Touch Fax It Making a fax lighter or darker 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number gt Options 4 Adjust the fax darkness and then touch Fax It Viewing a fax log 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings Reports 3 Click Fax Job L
324. s and then resend the print job For more information see Printing confidential and other held jobs on page 81 Step 2 The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data Delete the print job and then send it again For PDF files generate a new PDF and then print it again If you are printing from the Internet then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one For Windows users a Open the Print Properties folder b FromthePrintand Hold dialog select the Keep duplicate documents check box C Enter a PIN number For Macintosh users Save each print job name each job differently and then send the individual jobs to the printer Does the job print The problem is solved Go to step 3 Step 3 Free up additional printer memory by deleting some of the held jobs Does the job print The problem is solved Add additional printer memory Troubleshooting 280 Print job takes longer than expected Action Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 Change the environmental settings of the printer a From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings b Select Eco Mode or Quiet Mode and then select Off Note Disabling Eco Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the consumption of energy or supplies or both Did the job print Step
325. se To Wiping Mode Specify the mode for erasing temporary data files Auto Understanding the printer menus Use Automatic Method Single pass Multiple pass 160 To Mark all disk space used by a previous print job This method does not permit the file system to reuse this space until it has been cleared Notes Single pass is the factory default setting Only automatic wiping enables users to erase temporary data files without having to turn off the printer for an extended amount of time Highly confidential information should be erased using only the Multiple pass method Security Audit Log menu Use To Export Log Enable an authorized user to export the security log Notes To export the log from the printer control panel attach a flash drive to the printer To export the log from the Embedded Web Server download the log to a computer Delete Log Specify whether audit logs are deleted Yes No Configure Log Specify how audit logs are configured Enable Audit Notes Yes No Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and Enable Remote Syslog remote syslog No is the factory default setting No Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server No is the Yes factory default setting Remote Syslog Server 256 character string Remote Syslog Port 1 65535 Remote Syslog Method Normal UDP Stunnel Remote Syslog Facility 0 23 Log
326. seececesessaececeesseusecesesessaseeceses sueseueeeeens 225 Ordering a toner cartridge 5 eet det e et Ake ices wake hed eel dake Me es 225 Ordering an imaging UNI 5 e ee eoi e hen emi e e e cedem eve d ge AERE Ned 226 Ordering staple cartridges eed re ee ecce ette ike Ped reg tr de Re Pre ge te esee S 226 Ordering a maintenance kit mtem aeu ete ee ek 226 Ordering an ADF separator roller ci ee oe dei eos Hee ead eo ee ee eV l EE 226 Estimated number of remaining PAageS ccscsssssssssccecceceescesessesnensaeeceeeceseeeseseseseeneeeeeeeeeeeeseesesen esse 226 Contents 6 Storing supplies uciu rete eere eek eit ede a e Dee ERO dd Fee RR Rn Te EE vea Tue SS 227 Replacing supplies eerte a e ean e Re xk FEED a Nee ARCA E a edecanaddacanieiatesiees 227 Replacing the toner cartridge ce deca sec tirada lecce si dupl dee eee ce aber cla eMe Tele dans 227 Replacing the imaging Unity rene ele teb stage tetas Sense seadeecbataaltes cade eau ti eH 229 Replacing the staple cartridge ane vee Te ek et ee en d e eee 231 Moving the printer nore Ee oto ha Er eoe ot ett Een e EYE Rp esee aye a base aee deua Tee PARK eo ea Iano 233 Before moving the printer ee eee eerte etd te Bye dca edet edet ue ei verd ee dd 233 Moving the printer to another lOCation ccccccsscccccessssssecescessseecescsesseececcseseaseeecessesaaeecesssaaaeeeesesesesesaeeeeens 234 Shipping the printer ettet tetuer ereebeste e eate fetten
327. select Options amp Supplies 2 Navigate to the list of hardware options and then add any installed options 3 Apply the changes Attaching cables CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or to the network using an Ethernet cable 46 Additional printer setup 47 Make sure to match the following The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer The appropriate Ethernet cable with the Ethernet port Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the USB cable any network adapter or the printer in the area shown while actively printing or scanning Loss of data or a malfunction can occur Use the 1 Printer power cord socket Oooo To Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet 2 Power switch 3 Ethernet port Turn the printer on or off Connect the printer to an Ethernet network 4 EXT port 5 LINE port 6 USB port Connect additional devices telephone or answering machine to the printer and the telephone line Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line for the printer and if this connection method is supported in your country or region Note Remove the adapter plug to access the port Connect th
328. settings are correct for the document being scanned Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the document being scanned Contact customer support Change the Content Type and Content Source settings to match the document being scanned LLL Troubleshooting 315 Partial document or photo scans Check the placement of the document or photo Contact customer Load the document or Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner Support photo facedown on the glass in the upper left corner scanner glass in the upper left corner Is the document or photo loaded correctly Cannot scan from a computer Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 3 Go to step 2 Make sure the printer is turned on and that Ready appears on the printer display before scanning a job Does Ready appear before scanning the job Step 2 Clear the error Go to step 3 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the Message printer back on Is there an error message on the printer display Step 3 Contact customer Tighten the cable Check the cable connections between the printer and the print server to SUpport connections make sure they are secure For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer Are the cable connections between the printer and the print server secure Ye Troubleshooting Solving home screen applic
329. shielding Industrie Canada Canada Selon la r glementation d Industrie Canada l metteur radio ne fonctionner qu avec une antenne dont le type et le gain maximal ou inf rieur ont t approuv s par Industrie Canada Pour r duire les interf rences radio potentielles Notices 329 aupr s d autres utilisateurs le type d antenne et son gain doivent tre choisis de telle sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonn e quivalente PIRE ne soit pas sup rieure ce qui est n cessaire pour assurer la r ussite de la communication Cet appareil est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence d Industrie Canada Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes 1 cet appareil ne doit pas causer d interf rences et 2 il doit accepter toutes les interf rences y compris les interf rences pouvant entrainer un fonctionnement ind sirable Pour viter toute interf rence radio au service sous licence cet appareil est destin tre utilis l int rieur et l cart des fen tres afin d assurer une protection maximale Taiwan NCC RF notice statement NCC 4 sta eax i Ee SH UR TNEHE ZI SER BR TEUER Si 0 8 FH HERR TRECE SEE SECURE BER PE ER E BEG S I fA EUR SEU ES GL ES FREE RT AE Pape are Ae SS KD Esp E Jig ez Rel Be PT VU e ER SN BZ f HI P RL EE ICT eG US DEEDEBUR TERA EENH Xf Ose se ERE VERRE H Brem Pe EBLE ESE ZR KS RS TW fa Be L3 ARAB AD EREA PERPE M LT Ts
330. siens nane enn 58 Using the standard bin and paper StOP cccccccccscsssssssseceeceeceecescesessseseeseeceeeessususeueusaeeseeseeeseseesaeeseeeees 63 Linking and unlinking trays ariete a A a a ae aa aeii aaa Eii iaa 64 linking and unlinking trays oiana a iea E a aE aiaa Re Es ee aaoi aas 64 Creating a custom name for a paper type ssssssssssssseseeeeeee nennen enne enne nent asse entrenar ener nens s ss rsen nnne 64 Assigning a custom paper type ssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeenne nennen nennen nennen tn nins ania nass iaaa sees sean sterne entrer tenni nnne 65 Configuring a Custom riatTie c oec bte tte fiiic etta rest ee suisse deeded ofendesates Seated adeatadastouadtetes 65 Paper and specialty media guide e ecce eere eee 07 Using specialty media 1 A E E iore aera erede ERES EE SEE RE PR ENSE SERT EE e ha PUER ER e e Ta 67 Paper guidelimes ie b D I RR PER o RR e EU ISI DT bete ia 69 Supported paper sizes types and WEIgNHS ccccssssssssnsceceecesssssnsnsseeeecescecsssseusaueeeeeecessessaseseeseeaeeeees 72 Malt Mee n u d Printing forms and a COCUMENL ccccceessssaecceceesessesnsaueeceecesssssensusesececescesesssesececesesesesuaueseeeessseeeeseees 77 Printing from a flash drive or mobile device esses eene eene nnne enne n nenne nennen 78 Printing confidential and other held jobs essen enne ennemis nnn nennen en
331. spaper Press Other 171 To Specify how the original document was produced Note Black White Laser is the factory default setting Sides Duplex 1 sided to 1 sided 1 sided to 2 sided 2 sided to 1 sided 2 sided to 2 sided Paper Saver Off 2 up Portrait 4 up Portrait 2 up Landscape 4 up Landscape Print Page Borders On Off Collate 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 Staple Off On Specify whether an original document is two sided or one sided and then specify whether the copy should be two sided or one sided Note 1 sided to 1 sided is the factory default setting This setting is selected when using a one sided original document for a one sided copy job Copy two or four sheets of a document on one page Note Off is the factory default setting Specify whether a border is printed Note Off is the factory default setting Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies Note 1 2 3 1 2 3 is the factory default setting Enable the staple finisher Notes e Off is the factory default setting This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is installed Understanding the printer menus Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Custom Scan Size x Book Original Business Card 3x5in 4x6in ID Card Specify the size of the original document 172 Note Letter
332. ss Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow Scan or copy documents up to 216 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 inches long Copy books up to 25 3 mm 1 inch thick Understanding the printer control panel 15 Understanding the printer control panel Using the printer control panel Use the Display View the printer status and messages Set up and operate the printer Home button Go to the home screen Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode Press any hard button Open a door or cover Send a print job from the computer Perform a power on reset POR with the main power switch Attach a device to the USB port on the printer Keypad Enter numbers letters or symbols Indicator light Check the status of the printer Start button Start a job depending on which mode is selected Cancel button Stop all printer activity Clear All Reset button Reset the default settings of a function such as printing copying or e mailing Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights The colors ofthe Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition Printer status Off The printer is off or in Hibernate mode Blinking green The printer is warming up processing data or printing Understanding the printer control
333. ss Card 3x5in 4x6in Sides Duplex off Long edge Short edge Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two sided scanning Note Off is the factory default setting e Understanding the printer menus Use JPEG Quality Best for content 5 90 Text Default 5 90 Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image 192 To Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image Notes Best for content is the factory default setting 5reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large Note 75 is the factory default setting Text Photo Default 5 90 Set the quality of a text photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default 5 90 Use Multi Page TIFF On Off TIFF Compression LZW JPEG Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Log Paper Source Tray x Multipurpose Feeder Provide a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a Specify the format used in compressing TIFF files Specify whether to print the transmission log Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image
334. ss Sleep Button Do Nothing Sleep Hibernate 170 LS Set the printer to automatically check for jammed paper Note On is the factory default setting Successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwise Notes Offisthe factory default setting This prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page On sets the printer to print the entire page Determine how the printer while in idle state reacts to a short press of the Sleep button Note Sleep is the factory default setting Press and Hold Sleep Button Do Nothing Sleep Hibernate Determine how the printer while in idle state reacts to a long press of the Sleep button Note Do Nothing is the factory default setting Factory Defaults Do Not Restore Restore Now Export Configuration File Export Use the printer factory default settings except the Network Ports menu settings Notes Do Not Restore is the factory default setting All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted Downloads stored in the flash memory or on a hard disk are not affected Export configuration files to a flash drive Copy Settings menu Content Type Text Graphics Text Photo Photo Specify the content of the original document Note Text Photo is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Content Source Black White Laser Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine New
335. ssion E mail address and Password Prompt user Device Userid Device password Kerberos 5 Realm NTLM Domain Security menu Edit Security Setups menu Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP server Notes None is the factory default setting for Device Initiated E mail and User Initiated E mail Device Userid and Device password are used to log in to the SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected Note This menu appears only in select touch screen printer models Understanding the printer menus 157 Use To Edit Backup Password Create a backup password Use Backup Password Notes Off Ws Off is the factory default setting for Use Backup Password n eS password This menu appears only if a backup password exists Edit Building Blocks Edit settings for Internal Accounts NTLM Simple Kerberos Setup Kerberos Setup Internal Accounts Active Directory LDAP Password and PIN NTLM Simple Kerberos Setup Kerberos Setup Active Directory LDAP LDAP GSSAPI Password PIN Edit Security Templates Add or edit a security template list of available templates Edit Access Controls Control access to printer menus firmware updates held jobs and other access Administrative Menus points Function Access Management Solutions Cancel jobs at the Device a S Understanding the printer menus 158 Miscellaneous Security Settings me
336. stomer as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If you experience trouble with this equipment for repair or warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc at www lexmark com or your Lexmark representative If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved This equipment contains no user serviceable parts For repair and warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc See the previous paragraph for contact information Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment consult your telephone company or a qualified installer Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to custom
337. t Timeouts b Increase the Print Timeout setting and then touch Submit c Resend the print job Did the file print correctly Print quality problems Characters have jagged or uneven edges ABC DEF Action Step 1 a by the printer 1 From the printer control panel navigate to szm gt Reports gt Print Fonts 2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts want to use For more information contact your system support person c Resend the print job Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges Print a font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are supported b Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you Action Yes No Step 3 The problem is solved Contact customer Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size support of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the job Did the job print and collate correctly J Unexpected page breaks occur Yes No The problem is solved Check the original file for manual page breaks Yes No Go to step 2 The problem is solved Troubleshooting Action Step 2 a Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you want to use on your computer For more information contact your system support person b Resend the print job Do prints still contain cha
338. t emulation This setting has no effect on PCL emulation print jobs Timeouts Set the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention Job Hold Timeout before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and 5 255 continues to print other jobs in the print queue Error Recovery Auto Reboot Reboot when idle Reboot always Reboot never Notes 30 is the factory default setting This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed Set the printer to restart when an error occurs Note Reboot always is the factory default setting Error Recovery Max Auto Reboots 1 20 Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can perform Note 2 is the factory default setting Print Recovery Auto Continue Disabled 5 255 Print Recovery Jam Recovery On Off Auto Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when these are not resolved within the specified time period Note Disabled is the factory default setting Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages Notes Auto is the factory default setting The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages Understanding the printer menus Use Print Recovery Jam Assist On Off Print Recovery Page Protect Off On Pre
339. t number 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 Press then enter the shortcut number using the keypad and then touch v Note To enter additional recipients touch Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number that you want to add 4 Touch Send It E mailing 98 Sending an e mail using the address book 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient s gt 4 gt type the name of the recipient gt Search 4 Touch the name of the recipient Note To enter additional recipients touch Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number that you want to add or se
340. t to change See www lexmark com for current values Notices 323 Sleep Mode This product is designed with an energy saving mode called Sleep Mode The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time called the Sleep Mode Timeout Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product in minutes 20 By using the configuration menus the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 120 minutes Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption but may increase the response time of the product Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response but uses more energy Hibernate Mode This product is designed with an ultra low power operating mode called Hibernate mode When operating in Hibernate Mode all other systems and devices are powered down safely The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods Using the Hibernate Timeout Using the Schedule Power modes Using the Sleep Hibernate button Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions 3 days The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between one hour and one month Off mode If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of powe
341. t using the handle 3 Lift the green handle and then pull the imaging unit out of the printer Maintaining the printer 230 4 Unpack the new imaging unit and then shake it 5 Remove all packing materials from the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 6 Insert the imaging unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the imaging unit with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer Maintaining the printer 231 7 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer 8 Close the front door Replacing the staple cartridge 1 Open the stapler door Maintaining the printer 232 2 Pull out the staple cartridge from the finisher 4 Remove the spare staple case from its holder 5 Insert the spare staple case into the staple cartridge o ee 5 Maintaining the printer 233 6 Push the staple cartridge into the finisher until it clicks into place 7 Replace the spare staple case for future use 8 Close the stapler door Moving the printer Before moving the printer A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer
342. t your system support person Imaging unit low 84 xy You may need to order a replacement imaging unit If necessary select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing Imaging unit nearly low 84 xy If necessary touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing Imaging unit very low x estimated pages remain 84 xy You may need to replace the imaging unit very soon For more information see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide If necessary touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing Incompatible tray x 59 Try one or more of the following Remove the indicated tray From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the indicated tray Incorrect paper size open paper source 34 Try one or more of the following Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray and then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in Print Properties or the Print dialog settings Checkif the paper size is correctly set For example if MP Feeder Size is set to Universal then make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed Checkthe length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray From
343. te PDF pdf is the factory default setting Configure the PDF settings Notes 1 5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression This menu item appears only when a formatted working hard disk is installed e Off is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF Secure PDF requires you to enter your password twice Specify the content of the original document Note Text Photo is the factory default setting 186 Content Source Black White Laser Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Color Off On Specify how the original document was produced Note Black White Laser is the factory default setting Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color Note On is the factory default setting WM Understanding the printer menus Use Resolution 75 dpi 150 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi Darkness 1 9 187 To Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting Lighten or darken the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Portrait Landscape Specify the orientation of the scanned image Note Portrait is the factory default setting Original Si
344. te The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address Note The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Set Zone Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network list of zones available on the network Note The default zone for the network is the factory default setting Standard USB menu PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onisthe factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to Off Understanding the printer menus Use PS SmartSwitch On Off NPA Mode On Off Auto USB Buffer Disabled Auto 3K to maximum size allowed 150 To Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes Onisthe factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwit
345. tep 2 The problem is solved 274 No Contact customer support Check if you have a supported ISP Note An ISP from another printer may not work on this printer Contact customer support USB parallel interface card does not operate correctly Action Step 1 Make sure the USB or parallel interface card is installed a Install the USB or parallel interface card For more information see Installing an Internal Solutions Port on page 32 b Print a menu settings page and then check if the USB or parallel interface card is listed in the Installed Features list Is the USB or parallel interface card listed in the Installed Features list Yes Go to step 2 No Check if you have a supported USB or parallel interface card Note A USB or parallel interface card from another printer may not work on this printer Troubleshooting Action Step 2 Check the cable and the USB or parallel interface card connection Use the correct cable and then make sure it is securely connected to the USB or parallel interface card Does the USB or parallel interface card operate correctly Paper feed problems Paper frequently jams Action Step 1 a Pull out the tray and then do one or more of the following Make sure paper lies flat in the tray Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on t
346. ter in an upright position Avoid severe jarring movements Shipping the printer When shipping the printer use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit Managing the printer 235 Managing the printer Finding advanced networking and administrator information This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server For more advanced system support tasks see the Networking Guide on the Software CD or the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide at http support lexmark com Checking the virtual display 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Checkthe virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel Setting up e mail alerts Configure the printer to send you e mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed or added or when there is a paper jam 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address
347. tes to Transport Layer Security TLS implemented in the product or service The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for AES CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS implemented in the product or service Notices 334 The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital Signature Algorithm ECDSA implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 IKEv1 implemented in the product or service Index Index Numerics 250 sheet tray installing 43 550 sheet tray installing 43 Symbols x page jam remove all pages from the output bin Leave paper in bin 45y xx 249 x page jam clear manual feeder 25y xx 247 x page jam clear standard bin 20y xx
348. the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs For more information see Adding available options in the print driver on page 46 Installing a printer hard disk A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 28 2 Unpack the printer hard disk 3 Install the printer hard disk on the controller board Warning Potential Damage Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly Do not touch or press on the center of the printer hard disk Doing so may cause damage Additional printer setup a Using a flat head screwdriver loosen the screws b Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board Note The plug and the receptacle are color coded blue 40 Additional printer setup 41 c A
349. the application you want to configure C Click Configure and then do either of the following To export a configuration to a file click Export and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file Notes When saving the configuration file you can type a unique file name or use the default name Ifa JVM Out of Memory error occurs then repeat the export process until the configuration file is saved To import a configuration from a file click Import and then browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer Notes Before importing the configuration file you can choose to preview it first or load it directly Ifa timeout occurs and a blank screen appears then refresh the Web browser and then click Apply 3 To export or import a configuration for multiple applications do the following a Click Settings Import Export b Doeither of the following Toexporta configuration file click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file To import a configuration file do the following 1 Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File gt Choose File and then browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer 2 Click Submit Additional printer setup 27 Additional printer setup Installing internal options
350. the list Note The scanner scans and sends the document to the directory you specified 8 View the file from the computer Note The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified Setting up Scan to Computer Notes This feature is supported only in Windows Vista or later Make sure your computer and printer are connected to the same network 1 Open the printers folder and then select your printer Note If your printer is not in the list then add your printer 2 Open the printer properties and then adjust the settings as necessary 3 From the control panel touch Scan to Computer select the appropriate scan setting Send It Scanning to a flash drive 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer Note The USB Drive home screen appears 4 Select the destination folder and then touch Scan to USB drive Note The printer goes back to the home screen after 30 seconds of inactivity 5 Adjust the scan settings and then touch Scan It
351. the printer display then clear the message Note The printer continues to print after clearing the message Do the jobs print Step 4 a Check if the ports USB serial or Ethernet are working and if the cables are securely connected to the computer and the printer Note For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer b Resend the print job Do the jobs print The problem is solved The problem is solved Go to step 4 Go to step 5 Step 5 a Turn off the printer wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on b Resend the print job Do the jobs print Step 6 a Remove and then reinstall the printer software For more information see Installing the printer on page 46 Note The printer software is available at http support lexmark com b Resend the print job Do the jobs print The problem is solved The problem is solved Go to step 6 Contact customer support Troubleshooting Confidential and other held jobs do not print 279 Note Confidential Verify Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs Action Step 1 Open the held jobs folder on the printer display and then verify that your print job is listed Is your print job listed in the held jobs folder Yes Go to step 2 No Select one of the Print and Hold option
352. the recipient gt Search Note You can search only for one name at a time 4 Touch the name of the recipient and then touch Fax It Sending a fax at a scheduled time 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax enter the fax number Delayed Send Note If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server then the Delayed Send button will not appear Faxes waiting for transmission are listed in the fax queue 4 Specify the time the fax will be transmitted and then touch ZS The time is increased or decreased in 30 minute increments 5 Touch Fax It Note The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time Creating shortcuts Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Faxing 119 Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123
353. the telephone to the port Faxing 109 Scenario 3 VoIP telephone service To connect 1 Connect one end of a telephone cable to the port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active You may need to pay extra to your VoIP provider if you want to activate the second phone port 3 Remove the protective plug from the port of the printer and then connect the telephone to the port Tips for this setup To make sure that the phone port on the VoIP adapter is active plug an analog telephone into the phone port and then listen for a dial tone If you hear a dial tone then the port is active f you need two phone ports for your devices but do not want to pay extra then do not plug the printer into the second phone port You can use a phone splitter Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line 1 or Phone Port and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter Make sure you use a phone splitter not a line splitter To make sure that you are using the correct splitter plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone Faxing 110 Scenario 4 Digital telephone service through a cable provider Setup 1 Printer is connected directly to a cable modem
354. ting printer options internal option is not detected 272 Internal Solutions Port 274 memory card 274 tray problems 273 USB parallel interface card 274 troubleshooting scan cannot scan from a computer 315 partial document or photo scans 315 scan job was not successful 312 scanner unit does not close 302 313 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 313 U unacceptable paper 70 understanding the home screen buttons andicons 16 uneven print density 301 Unformatted flash detected 53 268 Universal Paper Size setting 53 Universal paper size setting 53 Universal Setup menu 142 unlinking trays 64 65 Unsupported option in slot x 55 269 Unsupported USB hub please remove 258 USB port 46 USB port x disabled 56 269 USB parallel interface card troubleshooting 274 using a shortcut number scanning to an FTP address 126 345 using Forms and Favorites 77 using Hibernate mode 215 using recycled paper 213 using Schedule Power Modes 216 using shortcuts sending fax 117 using the address book 98 sending fax 118 using the Embedded Web Server 13 using the ScanBack Utility 129 using the touch screen buttons 18 Utilities menu 206 V verify print jobs 80 printing from a Macintosh computer 81 printing from Windows 81 vertical voids appear 299 viewing reports 235 viewing a faxlog 120 virtual display checking using Embedded Web Server 235 voice mail setting up 104 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP fax setup
355. ting preprinted forms and letterhead Use grain long for 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib weight paper Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces Use papers printed with heat resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers The ink must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230 C 446 F without melting or releasing hazardous emissions Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner Inks that are oxidation set or oil based generally meet these requirements latex inks might not When in doubt contact the paper supplier Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230 C 446 F without melting or releasing hazardous emissions Using recycled paper and other office papers As an environmentally conscious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser electrophotographic printers In 1998 Lexmark presented to the US government a study demonstrating that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non recycled paper However no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper 20 10096 post consumer waste and a variety of test paper from around the world using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions Lexmar
356. tion All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job Note Off is the factory default setting Specify the custom overlay text Allow priority copies On Off Custom Job scanning On Off Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document Note On is the factory default setting Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single copy job Notes Offisthe factory default setting This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Background Removal 4 to 4 Auto Center Off On Save custom copy settings as shortcuts Note On is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Automatically align the content at the center of the page Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Color Dropout Color Dropout 174 To Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold Best for content Notes None Red None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout Green 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast Specify the contrast used for the copy job 0
357. to match the paper loaded in the tray Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency Yes Go to step 2 296 No Set the paper type to Transparency Step 2 a Check if you are using a recommended type of transparency b Resend the print job Is the print quality still poor Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Action Step 1 a Depending on your operating system specify the tray or feeder from Printing Preferences or the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Step 2 From the printer control panel set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in the tray Contact customer support Yes Go to step 2 Go to step 3 The problem is solved The problem is solved Change the paper type and weight to match the paper loaded in the tray Step 3 a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Go to step 4 The problem is solved Troubleshooting 297 Action Yes No Step 4 Go to step 5 The problem is solved a Reinstall the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit Warning Pote
358. to 195 C 383 F Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems Before loading transparencies flex fan and straighten the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together Tips on using envelopes Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 230 C 446 F without sealing wrinkling curling excessively or releasing hazardous emissions For best performance use envelopes made from 90 g m 24 Ib bond paper or 2596 cotton All cotton envelopes must not exceed 75 g m 20 Ib bond weight Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages Paper and specialty media guide 68 To optimize performance and minimize jams do not use envelopes that Have excessive curl or twist Are stuck together or damaged in any way Have windows holes perforations cutouts or embossing Have metal clasps string ties or folding bars Haveaninterlocking design Have postage stamps attached Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position Have bent corners Have rough cockle or laid finishes Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes Note A combination of high humidity over 6096 and high printing temperature may wrinkle or s
359. to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onisthe factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onisthe factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off Understanding the printer menus Use NPA Mode On Off Auto 154 To Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes Auto is the factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then processes it appropriately When set to On the printer performs NPA processing If the data is not in NPA format it is rejected as bad data When set to Off the printer does not perform NPA processing Changing this setting from the printer c
360. to the bracket ISP exterior cover Screws to attach the ISP metal bracket to the printer cage Plastic bracket ao u BPl _ wn e Long ISP cable M 4 Place the plastic bracket inside the ISP exterior cover until it clicks into place 5 Slide and push the ISP solution into the plastic bracket Additional printer setup 6 Secure the ISP solution to the plastic bracket using the long screw 7 Tighten the two screws on the end of the ISP solution 35 Additional printer setup 36 8 Attach the white plug of the ISP solution interface cable into the white receptacle on the ISP 9 Attach the ISP exterior cover at an angle by inserting the left hinges first Additional printer setup 10 Lower the rest of the cover and then slide the cover to the right 37 Additional printer setup 38 12 Open the shield using the green handle 13 Attach the blue plug of the ISP solution interface cable into the blue receptacle on the controller board Note If you have installed a printer hard disk then you need to remove it For more information see a Removing a printer hard disk on page 42 To reinstall the printer hard disk see Installing a printer hard disk on page 39 Additional printer setup 39 14 Close the shield 15 Close the ISP exterior cover Note When the printer software and any hardware options are installed it may be necessary to manually add
361. tory default setting for each color threshold Contrast 0 5 Best for content Specify the contrast of the scanned image Note Best for content is the factory default setting Mirror Image Off On Create a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Negative Image Create a negative image of the original document Scan edge to edge Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Shadow Detail Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image 4 to 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting Adjust ADF Skew Correct slight skew in the scanned image Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting Off On Specify whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Sharpness Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature Specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default Ato4 while warm values generate a redder output than the default Note 0 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 198 Print Settings Copies Specify a default number of copies for each print job 1 999 Note 1 is the factory default setting Paper Source Set a default paper source for all print jobs Tray x Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Multipurpose Feeder Manual Paper Manual Envelope Co
362. truction sheet that came with the supply Note If you do not have a replacement imaging unit then see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Replace cartridge O estimated pages remain 88 xy Replace the toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Note If you do not have a replacement cartridge then see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Replace imaging unit O estimated pages remain 84 xy Replace the imaging unit to clear the message and continue printing For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Note If you do not have a replacement imaging unit then see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Replace maintenance kit O estimated pages remain 80 xy The printer is scheduled for maintenance For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com or contact your service representative and then report the message Replace all originals if restarting job Try one or more of the following Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately a
363. ts network It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom nor does it provide any sort of warranty Above all it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom s network services This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom s 111 Emergency Service This equipment may not provide for the effective hand over of a call to another device connected to the same line This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom s telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom s specifications There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation and The equipment shall go on hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another Notices 327 Japanese telecom n
364. ts to the folder where the bookmark is located 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen and then navigate through form categories or search for forms based on a form number name or description Setting up and using the home screen applications 23 Setting up Card Copy Note A later version of this User s Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator s Guide of this application To check for updates of this User s Guide go to http support lexmark com Use To Quickly and easily copy insurance identification and other wallet size cards You can scan and print both sides of a card on a single page saving paper and showing the information on the card in a more convenient manner 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings Apps Apps Management Card Copy 3 Change the default scanning options if necessary Default tray Select the default tray to be used for printing scan images Default number of copies Specify the number of copies that should automatically print when the application is used Default contrast setting Specify a setting to increase or decrease the level of contrast when a copy of the scanned card is printed Sele
365. ueeze and then slide the length guide tab backward to accommodate their length When loading legal size paper the length guide extends beyond the base leaving the paper exposed to dust To protect the paper from dust you can purchase a dust cover separately For more information contact customer support f you are loading A6 size paper in the standard tray squeeze and then slide the length guide tab toward the center of the tray to the A6 size position Make sure the width and length guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray Loading paper and specialty media 56 4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 5 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not and whether two sided printing is needed Loading paper and specialty media Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher Two sided duplex printing Two sided duplex printing 57 Make surethe paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the width guide Overfilling may cause paper jams Loading paper and specialty media 58 6 Insert the tray _ 7 From the printer control panel set the paper size and paper type in the Pa
366. ufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 37 260 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 37 260 Load paper source with custom string paper orientation 261 Index Load paper source with custom type name paper orientation 260 Load paper source with paper size paper orientation 261 Load paper source with paper type paper size paper orientation 261 Load Manual Feeder with custom string paper orientation 262 Load Manual Feeder with custom type name paper orientation 261 Load Manual Feeder with paper size paper orientation 262 Load manual feeder with paper type paper size paper orientation 262 Maintenance kit low 80 xy 262 Maintenance kit nearly low 80 xy 262 Maintenance kit very low x estimated pages remain 80 xy 262 Memory full 38 263 Memory full cannot print faxes 263 Memory full cannot send faxes 263 Network x software error 54 263 No analog phone line connected to modem fax is disabled 263 Non Lexmark supply type see User s Guide 33 xy 263 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 52 264 Paper changes needed 264 Parallel port x disabled 56 264 Printer had to restart Last job may be incomplete 264 Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge 31 xy 265 Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit 31 xy 266 Remove defective disk 61 264 Remove paper from standard output bin 264 Repl
367. und is selected a Depending on your operating system set off white background from Print Properties or the Print dialog b Resend the print job Did the background disappear from the prints Incorrect margins on prints Yes No Action Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded b Resend the print job Are the margins correct Troubleshooting Action Step 2 From the printer control panel set the paper size in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray Step 3 a Depending on your operating system specify the paper size from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Are the margins correct Paper curl Action Step 1 Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded Are the width and length guides positioned correctly Step 2 From the printer control panel set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in the tray Yes Go to step 3 The problem is solved Yes Go to step 2 Go to step 3 289 No Do one or more of the following Specify the paper size from the tray sett
368. utlet Are the other electrical equipment working electrical equipment and turn on the printer If the printer does not work then reconnect the other electrical equipment and then go to step 6 Step 7 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on Are the printer and scanner working The problem is solved Contact customer support Scan job was not successful Action Step 1 Check the cable connections Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer Are the cables securely connected Yes Go to step 2 r Connect the cables properly Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another application or being used by another user Is the file you want to scan open in another application or being used by another user Step 4 Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing file check box is selected in the destination configuration settings Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box selected in the destination configuration settings scanning Go to step 5 Step 2 Change the file name Go to step 3 Check if the file name is already in use Is the file name already in use Step 3 Close the file you are Go to step 4 Selectthe Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box in the destination configuration settings
369. veda ER IRE MRE ENSEM E EE E REE Eee 99 Understanding the e mail options eese nnne eene nnnm nnnnn nnns nsns nenne eren nnn nennen nnn 99 ui m O LOZ Setting Up the printer to fax iode tert teri eee see tete eres Deae getie eee erae hee eto a edere edel ee tees 102 SI Te DIE ELO EOD EID LI E 116 Creating Shortc ts 5c ertet e e e eive ded dredeetun d desereret eee Pere a rh E dd 118 Customizing fax settlngs eee er exin re e SNR RE CR eX TERR TER YE SENSE ERN YS LEO Ea RETE Sa e ATE NER QP EE Eas 119 Canceling an outgoing fax tie P nee er Eng a ER eene ERE een EFE Ee odasmanin ecce e Ye esee euer echo 121 Holding and forwarding faxes nperi eene enhn nnne nene a aa a senses e enn ersten nent 121 Understanding the fax options scsi iaoe riata onnaa Eana EAEE AERE EE EERE e aeaa 122 SCANMIN E A E E E E E EA 2D Using Scan to Network aa ei a eoe ee extare Ea EE a ATE EE regna PARESE EA Aa PEARa de Ne ea aene CER ad eges 125 Scanning to an FTP address a ree ide esie EARN arena en ees ehe EYED HAS e E HE vavdeandetecke 125 Scanning to a computer or flash Crive cccsccsssccccccecescecsssssesesnensececeecececceececesceseauaususaeaeeseeseseesueesess 127 Understanding the scan Options cccccssssssssnsssceeecescescecesessssnsseseeeeceeceeceeesseaeausueseeseseeesseseseesseeeeeeess 129 Understanding the printer menus eee eee eene eee eee een eee ees ee 132
370. viceable used parts which perform like new parts ls during normal use free from defects in material and workmanship If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement at Lexmark s option If this product is a feature or option this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended To obtain warranty service you may be required to present the feature or option with the product Notices 332 If you transfer this product to another user warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user Limited warranty service The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it or its original contents are substantially used up depleted or consumed Fuser Units Transfer Transport Units Paper Feed items if any and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a Life Warning or Scheduled Maintenance message for such item To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase You
371. weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it Maintaining the printer 234 e f an optional tray is installed then remove it from the printer To remove the optional tray slide the latch on the right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down Before setting up the printer make sure there is adequate clearance around it Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer s authorized replacement Warning Potential Damage Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty Moving the printer to another location The printer and its hardware options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer Anycart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the hardware options Keep the prin
372. wing circumstances The printer is being decommissioned The printer hard disk is being replaced The printer is being moved to a different department or location The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization The printer is being removed from your premises for service The printer is being sold to another organization Disposing of a printer hard disk Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer or its hard disk is removed from your premises Degaussing Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data Crushing Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable Milling Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits Note Most data can be erased electronically but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored Erasing volatile memory The volatile memory RAM installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information To erase the buffered data simply turn off the printer Securing the printer 220 Erasing non volatile memory 4 Individual settings device and network settings security settings and embedded solutions Erase in
373. wo sided printing for all print jobs that specify Light as the paper type Heavy Loading Duplex Off Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Heavy as the paper type Notes Duplex sets two sided printing as the default for all print jobs unless one sided printing is set from Printing Preferences or Print dialog f Duplex is selected then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including one sided jobs e Off is the factory default setting for all the menus Understanding the printer menus 141 Custom x Loading Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Duplex Custom x as the paper type Off Note Custom x Loading is available only if the custom type is supported Notes Duplex sets two sided printing as the default for all print jobs unless one sided printing is set from Printing Preferences or Print dialog f Duplex is selected then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including one sided jobs e Off is the factory default setting for all the menus M Custom Types menu Custom Type x Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default custom type name or a user defined custom name created from the Embedded Web Server or from MarkVision Professional Paper Card Stock Transparency Rough Cotton Labels Envelope Recycled Paper Card Stock Transparency Rough Cotton Labels Enve
374. work nennen nn nennen 48 Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard eessssssseeeeeee eere enne nnne 49 Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi Fi Protected Setup eese 50 Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Servel cssscsccceesessseecseseseeeeees 51 Changing port settings after installing a new network ISP cccssessccescessecceecssnseeceeseseseeceeseeseeeseeseaessnaeees 51 Setting up serial printing Windows only car a T enne nnn rese reser nennen 52 Verifying printer Setup ice ee a Pe e Dee auch Pee Eee tr Te NER EI ER ER pee eder EXE EHE EUR 52 Printing a menu settings page ccccssscccssecccccecceessseeseseeeeeeneneeseeeeeceeeeeeseeeseeeeaeeeaaeeaaueeeeceeeeeeses esses esee esterne nnn 52 Printirig a network setup Pa Be veces enne etie eerie ette ETEei iaaa ien Eata rente ebewse dee enu ee key uana 52 Loading paper and specialty media eee eere eee DD Setting the paper size and type eere oret esee oo eT aane eee a nen d ee Fa ad Reano dea vae aa Seas sleddadedes 53 Configuring Universal paper settings esses eee een enne nen n annus nsn ssa nasa sanis 53 Loading trays onte ete e p ERR T EE redes y ehe ERR tee Prisa diet bw RN Une eee piter E 53 Loading the multipurpose feeder essen nennen nennen nen nnnnnnn rsen tenete nnns nns n
375. xmark com Use To Scan a document and then send the scanned document to multiple destinations Note Make sure there is enough space in the printer hard disk 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The printer IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management gt Multi Send 3 From the Profiles section click Add and then customize the settings Notes See the mouse over help beside each field for a description of the setting f you select FTP or Share Folder as a destination then make sure the location settings of the destination are correct Type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer see Finding the IP address of the computer on page 20 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Multi Send on the printer home screen and then follow the instructions on the printer display Setting up Scan to Network Note A later version of this User s Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator s Guide of this application To check for updates of this User s Guide go to http support lexmark com Setting up and using the home screen applications 25 Use To Scan a document and send it t
376. y Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Yes Go to step 4 298 No The problem is solved Step 4 a Reinstall the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 2 Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Step 5 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Horizontal voids appear on prints Leading edge EG Qe Gud 3 E a Go to step 5 Contact customer support at http support lexmar k com or your service representative The problem is solved The problem is solved Trailing edge Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern b Resend the print job Do horizontal voids appear on prints Step 2 Go to step 3 The problem is solved a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper b Resend the print job Do horizontal voids appear on prints M Troubleshooting Action Step 3 a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit 1 Re
377. ze Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A4 AS A6 JIS B5 Custom Scan Size x Book Original Business Card 3x 5in 4x 6in Specify the size of the original document Note Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Sides Duplex Off Long edge Short edge JPEG Quality Best for content 5 90 Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two sided scanning Note Off is the factory default setting Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image Notes Best for content is the factory default setting 5 reduces the file size and quality of the image 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large Text Default 5 90 Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting ee Understanding the printer menus Use Text Photo Default 5 90 Photo Default 5 90 188 To Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 50 is the factory default setting E mail images sent as Attachment Web Link Specify how the images are sent

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Philips BTD7170  50040746-303 A - evohome user (retail) (FR).indd  NI-FBUS Configurator User Manual, 1788-UM052B-EN-P  HP EC301 Cyan ink  31-077型 取扱説明書 保証書付 ガスセントラル給湯機能付外だきタイプ  Porter-Cable SPEEDTRONIC 518 User's Manual    Samsung SV-7000W VCR User Manual  A.O. Smith VWH 500-1000 High Efficiency Commercial Technical Documents  Akasa K32  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file